Home

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11 Server f/Windows, 1srv, 1y, Level I, DEU

1. Windows PE 2004 1 5 Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 Windows PE 2005 1 6 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x 1 Unpack all files of your WinPE 1 x ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE Select Use WinPE files located in the folder specify Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located 5 Specify network settings p 163 for the machine network adapters or choose DHCP auto configuration 6 Specify the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name 7 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed 8 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into the WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 starts automatically 8 1 3 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 Bootable Media Builder provides three methods of integrating Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 with WinPE 2 x or 3 0 Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing PE ISO This comes in handy when you have to add the plug in to the previously configured PE ISO that is already in use Creating the PE ISO with the plug in from scratch Adding the Acronis Plug in to a WIM file for any future purpose manual ISO buil
2. Occasional The order is on hold Your order was placed on hold due to technical difficulties processing the order Acronis is working on resolving these issues Occasional The order has been cancelled The order has been cancelled Occasional Address is undeliverable Acronis cannot send the disk On the same Web page click Change my delivery address and specify the correct address for the order Occasional Address has been updated This status is set after you have updated the delivery address on Acronis web site 11 1 7 9 How to perform large scale recovery The recovery procedure is the same as when recovering from the online storage Just specify the path to the location where your backups are For detailed information about recovery please refer to the context sensitive help 11 1 8 Subscription lifecycle FAQ This section explains a subscription lifecycle and subscription operations that you can perform on your account management Web page 11 1 8 1 How to access my account management Web page To access this Web page from the Acronis Web site 1 Select User Login 2 Login to your account create one if you are not registered yet 3 Navigate to Online backup gt for Business To access this Web page from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 1 On the Actions menu click Back up now or Create backup plan 2 Click Location and then click Buy or manage your subscriptions 3 Login to your account
3. 5 3 Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and vice versa Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 supports transferring Windows operating systems between BIOS based hardware and hardware that supports Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI Important When migrating systems to UEFI based hardware use Linux based bootable media since PE based bootable media and Acronis PXE Server do not support UEFI 5 3 1 Recovering volumes Let s assume you backed up the system and boot volumes or the entire machine and want to recover these volumes to a different platform The ability of the recovered system to boot up depends on the following factors Source operating system convertible or non convertible OS The following Microsoft Windows operating systems are convertible that is allow changing the boot mode from BIOS to UEFI and back Windows Vista SP1 x64 and later Windows Server 2008 x64 SP1 and later Windows 7 x64 Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 All other operating systems are non convertible Source and target disk partition style MBR or GPT System and boot volumes of BIOS platforms use MBR disks System and boot volumes of UEFI platforms use GPT disks When selecting not initialized target disk for recovery this disk will be automatically initialized either to GPT or to MBR depending on the original disk partitioning style the current boot mode UEFI or BIOS and the type of operating systems convertib
4. In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not recover until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the recovery after the recover Perform the recovery y y 7 command is concurrently with only after the executed despite the command command is execution failure execution and successfully executed or success irrespective of the Fail the task if the p command execution command execution result failed A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 5 7 7 2 Post recovery command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the recovery is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required Select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box if successful execution of the command is critical for you The command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero If the
5. In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify MyMachine as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box and select Full as the backup type Result The archive consists of a single file MyMachine tib This file is deleted before creating a new backup 4 3 1 2 Example 2 Daily full backups with a date stamp Consider the following scenario You want to perform a daily full backup of your machine You want to move older backups to a remote location by using a script In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify MyMachine DATE as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box and select Full as the backup type Result The backups of January 1 2011 January 2 2011 and so on are stored respectively as MyMachine 1 1 2011 tib MyMachine 1 2 2011 tib and so on Your script can move older backups based on the date stamp See also The Date variable p 52 4 3 1 3 Example 3 Hourly backups within a day Consider the following scenario You want to perform hourly backups of your server s critical files every day You want the first backup of each day to be full and to run at midnight and the subsequent backups of the day to be differential and to run at 01 00 02 00 and so on You want to keep older backups in the arch
6. When recovering the MBR of one disk to another Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 recovers Track 0 which does not affect the target disk s partition table and partition layout Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery so there is no need to recover the MBR and Track 0 for Windows systems unless the MBR is damaged 5 1 1 1 Selecting archive location Location ey Online backup storage z Personal al Centralized Machine name oy Local folders CD DVD etc E Tape device D Network folders O FTP SFTP Details If the archive is stored in Acronis Online Backup Storage click Log in and specify the credentials to log in to the online storage Then expand the Online backup storage group and select the account Exporting and mounting are not supported for backups stored in Acronis Online Backup Storage If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the required vault If the archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the appropriate vault This is the local machine name If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the lt Machine name gt group and select the required folder If the archive is stored on optical media such as CD or DVD expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive First insert the last DVD Then insert the discs in orde
7. With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA or Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM Files of the new virtual machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage The Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA can be imported to a XenServer using Citrix XenCenter You can move the files of the Kernel based Virtual Machine to a machine running Linux from there you can run this virtual machine by using the Virtual Machine Manager program The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine on the respective virtualization server Tip Microsoft Virtual PC does not support disks that are larger than 127 GB Acronis enables you to create a Virtual PC machine with larger disks so that you can attach the disks to a Microsoft Hyper V virtual machine To convert a disk backup to a virtual machine 1 Connect the console to the management server or to a machine where Agent for Windows Agent for Hyper V or Age
8. According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To export data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table on the right displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select in the tree While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name Exporting part of an archive to the same location Exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists Exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same
9. Exporting and importing backup plans p 193 Export a backup plan to an xml file and import it to a different machine Deploying backup plans as files p 196 Export a backup plan from one machine and deploy it as an xml file to multiple machines Disaster Recovery Plan p 82 The software can generate a disaster recovery plan and send it via e mail right after a backup creation The plan contains step by step instructions on how to recover Converting a backup to full p 157 Convert an incremental or differential backup to a full one New command line Provides backup and recovery automation Includes remote management Automatic check for updates The management console automatically checks for updates upon each start and provides notification once the newer version is available 1 2 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 components This section contains a list of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 components with a brief description of their functionality Components for a managed machine agents These are applications that perform data backup recovery and other operations on the machines managed with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agents require a license to perform operations on each managed machine Agents have multiple features or add ons that enable additional functionality and so might require additional licenses Console The console provides Graphical User Interface to the agents Usage of the console is
10. Thus the following three schedules are added to the task First schedule Months December January February 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Second schedule 1 Months March April May September October November 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Every 12 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Third schedule Months June July August 2 Days 1 15 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set 4 4 4 At Windows Event Log event This type of schedule is effective only in Windows operating systems You can schedule a backup task to start when a certain Windows event has been recorded in one of the event logs such as the Application Security or System log For example you may want to set up a backup plan that will automatically perform an emergency full backup of your data as soon as Windows discovers that your hard disk drive is about to fail Parameters Log name Specifies the name of the log Select the name of a standard log Application Security or System from the list or type a log name for example Microsoft Office Sessions Event source Specifies the event source which typically indicates the program or the system component that caused the event for example disk Event type Specifies the event type Error Warning Information
11. About Windows loaders srssisciiniiiniiiienini aiani A A A a a a i 126 5 7 Default recovery Option renee EE EENEN EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEa 126 571s Additional settings itano i a e NE AA A ne aa ia on os Se oa rn Sa os es 128 572 EPROM Randle nrnnannnnn iiia he dh I es aes 129 5 7 3 EV Int CACHING E ics chante Snead cute waa sesc aback E exepeveas 129 574 Fil slevel SQCUCITY iorri decade cidade duct dadudasl ducedadudadeductdades 130 5 7 5 MOUNE DOINTS sa aaeeea eee nea etea e a a a ests headed Wists ch tesetu dh velba ete 130 57 6 NOtiPiCAtIONS innen anaana Mesa anaia a a a a a 131 ley A7 AE 18A ETA aare Lale OYE EE SEEE E E E EE E E E A AEN 132 5 7 8 RECOVEVPNON IV eeen rien rialari e e eel eli l i bind bas 134 Storing the backed up data sesessssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesessssssssssssesssseeseesesseseee 135 6 0 aul ts isi E II A 135 61 1 Working With vault vs ivcsseseets ivvsveoiiedcendaniededianidnniavieieadaiidicatardeitiaiidiaiaveddetie 136 6 1 2 Personal vauiltSAcn connie a i ne i a er Gs Rr ee Bae ee Se 136 6 2 ACKONIS SECUNE ZONE ia cctescectecst aaetenshetenereraneeenscenahentanehassberehetsuaberaracerenetsuabeberehenshonenasenatens 139 6 2 1 Creating Acronis Secure ZONE eeescesecceseteeseeenseeeeeeceeesceeeneeneaeeneaeeesaeeeeeeeaeeneaeeesaeeeneeseneeeeneeneneees 139 6 2 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone scceecceseceeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeecsaeeeaaeneaeeesaeee
12. Browse Select the Archive p 149 or the Backups p 149 Show access credentials p 149 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it Where to export Browse p 150 Specify the path to the location where the new archive will be created Be sure to provide a distinct name and comment for the new archive Show access credentials p 151 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not have enough privileges to access it After you have performed all the required steps click OK to start the export task As a result the program shows the Execution state of the task in the Backup plans and tasks view When the task ends the Task Information window shows the final state of the task execution 7 2 1 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the archive location in the Path field or select the required location in the tree p 100 2 Inthe table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 7 2 2 Backup selection To specify a backup s to export 1 At the top of the window
13. Information Date and time Date and time when the event took place Backup plan The backup plan the event relates to if any Task The task the event relates to if any Code It can be blank or the program error code if the event type is error Error code is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Module It can be blank or the number of the program module where an error was occurred It is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem Owner User name of the backup plan owner p 21 Message The event text description Date and time presentation varies depending on your locale settings 10 3 Alerts An alert is a message that warns about actual or potential problems The Alerts view lets you rapidly identify and solve the problems by monitoring the current alerts and view the alerts history Active and inactive alerts An alert can be either in an active or inactive state The active state indicates that the issue that caused the alert still exists An active alert becomes inactive when the problem that caused the alert is resolved either manually or on its own Note There is one alert type that is always active Backup not created This is because even if the cause of this alert was resolved and the following backups successfully created the fact that the backup was not created remains Fixing issues that cau
14. Optional Provide credentials for the archive location Mount settings Volumes p 154 Select volumes to mount and configure the mount settings for every volume assign a letter or enter the mount point choose the read write or read only access mode When you complete all the required steps click OK to mount the volumes 7 3 1 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree If the archive is stored in Acronis Online Backup Storage click Log in and specify the credentials to log in to the online storage Then expand the Online backup storage group and select the account Exporting and mounting are not supported for backups stored in Acronis Online Backup Storage If the archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network
15. Use the following credentials The software will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 7 1 5 When to validate As validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if you prefer to be immediately informed whether the data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered consider starting validation right after the task creation Choose one of the following Now to start the validation task right after its creation that is after clicking OK on the Validation page Later to start the one time validation task at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate parameters as follows Date and time the date and time when to start the task The task will be started manually do
16. create one if you are not registered yet 11 1 8 2 Where do I find the subscriptions that I purchased If you purchased your subscriptions from an Acronis partner you should have received an e mail confirming the registration codes for each subscription Create an account on the Acronis web site if you do not have one already and log in to it Navigate to Online backup gt For Business This is your account management Web page Click Enter new registration code and enter the registration codes The subscriptions will appear in the list of available subscriptions under the Manage Subscriptions tab If you purchased your subscriptions online using the Acronis Web site they are available immediately on your account management Web page The newly obtained subscriptions are listed at the Manage Subscriptions tab 11 1 8 3 When does my subscription begin Your subscription begins when you choose to have it begin not at the time of purchase The time count will begin as soon as the subscription is activated The first activation occurs when you assign a subscription to a certain machine To do so you need to have Acronis software installed 11 1 8 4 What happens when my subscription expires A month before the subscription expiration date you receive an e mail notification with an alert In addition you can see this alert on the account management web page near the machine This means you need to renew p 218 the subscription to continue
17. mounted volumes or cluster shared volumes see Mount points p 87 The preset is Disabled This option is effective only when you select for backup a folder that is higher in the folder hierarchy than the mount point If you select for recovery folders within the mount point or the mount point itself the selected items will be recovered regardless of the Mount points option value Please be aware that if the volume is not mounted at the moment of recovery the data will be recovered directly to the folder that has been the mount point at the time of backing up 5 7 6 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the ability of notifying users about recovery completion through e mail or the messaging service 5 7 6 1 E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Under Send e mail notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When recovery completes successfully to send notification when the recovery task has completed successfully When recovery fails to send notification when the re
18. p 140 Specify the exact size of the zone Moving or resizing of locked volumes such as the volume containing the currently active operating system requires a reboot Security Password p 140 Optional Protect the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access with a password The prompt for the password appear at any operation relating to the zone After you configure the required settings click OK In the Result confirmation p 141 window review the expected layout and click OK to start creating the zone 6 2 1 1 Acronis Secure Zone Disk The Acronis Secure Zone can be located on any fixed hard drive Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk A machine can have only one Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volumes free space The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk To allocate space for Acronis Secure Zone 1 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone The unallocated space and free space from all volumes of the first enumerated disk are selected by default The program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone 2 If you need to allocate more space for the zone you can select volumes from which free space can be taken Again the program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone depending on your selection You will be able to set the ex
19. p 44 Specify a path to the location where the backup archive will be stored and the archive name The archive name has to be unique within the location Otherwise backups of the newly created backup plan will be placed to the existing archive that belongs to another backup plan The default archive name is Archive N where N is the sequence number of the archive in the location you have selected Backup file naming access credentials archive comments To access these settings click Show backup file naming access credentials archive comments File naming p 48 Optional Select the Name backup files using the archive name as in Acronis True Image Echo rather than auto generated names check box if you want to use simplified file naming for the archive s backups Not available when backing up to a managed vault tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage Access credentials p 34 Optional Provide credentials for the location if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location Archive comments Optional Enter comments on the archive How to back up Backup scheme p 34 Specify when and how often to back up your data define for how long to keep the created backup archives in the selected location set up schedule for the archive cleanup procedure see Replication and retention settings below Use well known optimized backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower
20. sda2 Backups created using bootable media have simplified file names p 48 Standard names are assigned to the backups only if these are added to an existing archive with standard file naming or if the destination does not support simplified file names 4 The Linux style bootable media cannot write a backup to an NTFS formatted volume Switch to the Windows style if you need to do so 5 You can switch the bootable media between the Windows style and the Linux style by selecting Tools gt Change volume representation 6 There is no Navigation tree in the media GUI Use the Navigation menu item to navigate between views 7 Tasks cannot be scheduled in fact tasks are not created at all If you need to repeat the operation configure it from scratch 8 The log lifetime is limited to the current session You can save the entire log or the filtered log entries to a file 9 Centralized vaults are not displayed in the folder tree of the Archive window To access a managed vault type the following string in the Path field bsp node_address vault_name To access an unmanaged centralized vault type the full path to the vault s folder After entering access credentials you will see a list of archives located in the vault 8 3 1 Setting up a display mode For a machine booted from media a display video mode is detected automatically based on the hardware configuration monitor and graphics card specifications If for some re
21. APIC You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration vga ask Prompts for the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface Without the vga parameter the video mode is detected automatically vga mode_number Specifies the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface The mode number is given by mode_number in the hexadecimal format for example vga 0x318 Screen resolution and the number of colors corresponding to a mode number may be different on different machines We recommend using the vga ask parameter first to choose a value for mode_number quiet Disables displaying of startup messages when the Linux kernel is loading and starts the management console after the kernel is loaded This parameter is implicitly specified when creating the bootable media but you can remove this parameter while in the boot menu Without this parameter all startup messages will be displayed followed by a command prompt To start the management console from the command prompt run the command bin product nousb Disables loading of the USB Universal Serial Bus subsystem nousb2 Disables USB 2 0 support USB 1 1 devices still work with this parameter This parameter allows you to use some USB drives in the USB 1 1 mode if they do not work in the USB 2 0 mode nodma Disables direct memory access DMA for all IDE hard disk drives Preven
22. Acronis pool is selected 5 Click OK As a result the created vault appears in the Personal group of the vaults tree Merging and moving personal vaults What if I need to move the existing vault from one place to another Proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses the existing vault while moving files or disable the given plans See Actions on backup plans and tasks p 188 2 Move the vault folder with all its content to a new place manually by means of a third party file manager 3 Create a new vault 4 Editthe backup plans and tasks redirect their destination to the new vault 5 Delete the old vault How can I merge two vaults Suppose you have two vaults A and B in use Both vaults are used by backup plans You decide to leave only vault B moving all the archives from vault A there To do this proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses vault A while merging or disable the given plans See Actions on backup plans and tasks p 188 2 Move the content of vault A folder to vault B manually by means of a third party file manager 3 Edit the backup plans that use vault A redirect their destination to vault B 4 Inthe vaults tree select vault B to check whether the archives are displayed If not click Refresh 5 Delete vault A 6 2 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk spa
23. Audit success or Audit failure Event ID Specifies the event number which typically identifies the particular kind of events among events from the same source For example an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 7 occurs when Windows discovers a bad block on a disk whereas an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 15 occurs when a disk is not ready for access yet Examples Bad block emergency backup One or more bad blocks that have suddenly appeared on a hard disk usually indicate that the hard disk drive will soon fail Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will back up hard disk data as soon as such a situation occurs When Windows detects a bad block on a hard disk it records an event with the event source disk and the event number 7 into the System log the type of this event is Error When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source disk Event type Error Event ID 7 Important To ensure that such a task will complete despite the presence of bad blocks you must make the task ignore bad blocks To do this in Backup options go to Error handling and then select the Ignore bad sectors check box Pre update backup in Vista Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will automatically perform a backup of the system for example by backing up the volume where Windows is installed every time that Windows is a
24. Available options depend on the host you selected in the previous step Storage Choose the storage on the virtualization server or the folder to place the virtual machine files in Resultant VMs Specify the name of the virtual machine The default name is Backup_of_ Machine Name You can add more variables to the name The following templates are supported Plan Name Machine Name Virtual Host Name Virtual Machine Name Virtualization Server Type Folder on VMware vCenter If the management server is integrated with vCenter Server the resultant virtual machines will appear in the Acronis Backups folder on the vCenter You can specify a subfolder for the machines resulting from execution of the plan 4 6 1 Setting up a conversion schedule A disk backup p 233 created while executing a backup plan can be converted to a virtual machine immediately on schedule or combining both methods The conversion task will be created on the machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time If the agent that backs up the machine is installed outside it such is the case when a ESX i or Hyper V virtual machine is backed up at a hypervisor level the task will be created on the machine where the agent is The target virtual machine must be powered off by the time of conversion otherwise the conversion task will fail If this happens you can restart the conversion task manually after powering off the machine Any c
25. COVE A as BS ss a 110 516 Taskeredential Sen nnnsnnnnnnnnnn a aa aa a aaa aaa a Aaaa aa Aaaa LAA EKRA 111 5 2 Acronis Universal Restore ssssssssssssssststttttttttttt ttt t1111 tt tt EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEEE Ennen EEEE En Ena 111 5 2 1 Getting Universal REStOre ccccsccscsscececescecescsseeseeseesessecseesecsesseesecsecsecsecsessecsecsecsessesseseesaesaesaesaesaess 111 5 2 2 Using Universal Restore estat csectiedretedindatlaiinitndedininiledinitndiaiin dadiledin de Ea E E 112 5 3 Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and vice VEIrSa cccccscssssessseceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeees 114 5 3 1 Recovering VOlUM CS isicestetisrvesecccevectesdeadcvieaieddeiieedentaniediedtanisleatcba dled tadidleateiaetebiaviaues 114 53 2 RECOVErING disks centre r in OA SOs Sees CEs Oe es ees 116 5 4 ACFONISVACtIVE RESTONG serere cree cececteeceeecevecessct encase shen dese EEEE aE EEEE TEETE 118 5 5 Howto convert a disk backup to a Virtual machine c cc ceeeesseececeeeeaeeeseeeeceeeeeseaaeeeeeeeees 120 5 5 1 Virtual machine type virtualization Server selection ccccsccscesesseesseeeseeseeseesecseeseeseesecsesseeseeseeaees 122 55 2 Virtual machine settings oiiire iai anat a a e a a eaa a aade e ai 122 56 Bootability troublesnooting cesarercrerenrriroe i i eed cee O O O OO OE E 123 5 6 1 Howto reactivate GRUB and change its configuration ccccsceseeseeteeeeseeseeseeseeseeaeeseeseeseeseesesaeeaees 124 56 2
26. Inthe Data to back up section select the type of data you want to be backed up The list of available data types depends on the agents running on the machine and the types of licenses Disks volumes Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Linux is installed Select this option to back up entire physical machine or its individual disks or volumes To be able to back up this data you must have Administrator or Backup operator privileges A disk level backup enables you to recover the entire system in case of severe data damage or hardware failure The backup procedure is faster than copying files and may significantly speed up the backup process when backing up large volumes of data Folders files Available if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 for Linux is installed Select this option to back up specific files and folders A file level backup is not sufficient for recovery of the operating system Choose file backup if you plan to keep safe only certain data the current project for example This will reduce the archive size thus saving storage space In order to recover your operating system along with all the settings and applications you have to perform a disk backup 2 Inthe tree below the Data to back up section select the items to back up by selecting check boxes next to the items Selecting a check box for
27. Location name of the vault or path to the folder where the archive is stored Archive comments comments on the archive if provided 2nd 3rd 4th 5th location names of the locations to which the archive was copied or moved if specified in the backup plan Settings The Settings tab displays the following information Backup scheme the selected backup scheme and all its settings with schedules Validation if specified events before or after which the validation is performed and validation schedule If the validation is not set the Never value is displayed Backup options backup options changed against the default values 10 1 6 Task activity details The Task activity details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates on several tabs all information about the selected task or activity When a task or activity requires user interaction a message and action buttons appear above the tabs The message contains a brief description of the problem The buttons allow you to retry or stop the task or the activity 10 2 Log The local event log stores the history of operations performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 on the machine To view a plain list of log entries select Events in the Display drop down list to view log entries grouped by activities select Activities The details of the selected log entry or activity are shown in the Information panel at the bottom of the Log view
28. No No Notes Setting up both copying and moving backups from the same location is not possible With simplified naming of backup files p 48 neither replication nor use of retention rules is available 4 5 1 Supported locations You can copy or move a backup from any of these locations A local folder on a fixed or removable drive Anetwork folder An FTP or SFTP server Acronis Secure Zone You can copy or move a backup to any of these locations A local folder on a fixed or removable drive Anetwork folder An FTP or SFTP server Backups that were copied or moved to the next location do not depend on the backups remaining in the original location and vice versa You can recover data from any backup without access to other locations Restrictions Copying or moving backups to and from optical discs CD DVD Blu ray discs is not supported You cannot specify the same location more than once For example you cannot move a backup from one folder to another and then back to the original folder 4 5 2 Setting up replication of backups Setting up replication of backups is available when creating a backup plan p 29 To set up replication from the primary location select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box To set up replication from the second or a further location select the Replicate backups to another location as soon as they appear in this location check box Next s
29. Replicate just created backup to another location check box under How to back up or Move the oldest backups to another location in the Retention rules window Examples Weekly full backup The following scheme yields a full backup performed every Friday night Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Here all parameters except Schedule in Full backup are left empty All backups in the archive are kept indefinitely no archive cleanup is performed Full and incremental backup plus cleanup With the following scheme the archive will consist of weekly full backups and daily incremental backups We further require that a full backup begin only after all users have logged off Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Full backup Conditions User is logged off Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 9 00 PM Also let all backups older than one year be deleted from the archive and let the cleanup be performed upon creating a new backup Retention rules Delete backups older than 12 months Apply the rules After backing up By default a one year old full backup will not be deleted until all incremental backups that depend on it become subject to deletion too For more information see Retention rules p 69 Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup This example demonstrates the use of all options available in the Custom scheme Suppose that we need a schem
30. Seeding and to recovering data using Large Scale Recovery Backup and recovery options Some backup and recovery options are not supported by online backups For example Backup splitting p 81 By using the Backup performance gt Network connection speed option you can vary the transferring speed as kilobytes per second but not as a percentage 11 7 Terminology reference The following is the list of terms related to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service Activate a subscription Allow the machine to use the online storage according to the subscription Subscription period starts counting down when the subscription is activated Activated subscription A subscription that is currently being used by a machine Assign a subscription to a machine Reserve a subscription for a particular machine Subscription period does not start counting down until the subscription is activated Assigned subscription A subscription that has been assigned to a machine Available subscription A subscription that is not assigned to any machine Extra service A service that you can use in addition to online backup subscriptions Increase storage quota Replace a subscription with another one that has a greater storage quota The remaining subscription period is reduced in proportion to the capacity increase Initial Seeding An extra service that enables you to save an initial full backup locally and then send it to Acronis
31. Send Test WinPopup Message to check if the settings are correct 5 7 7 Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the data recovery Example of how you can use the pre post commands Launch the Checkdisk command in order to find and fix logical file system errors physical errors or bad sectors to be started before the recovery starts or after the recovery ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the recovery Execute after the recovery 2 Do any of the following m Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK 5 7 7 1 Pre recovery command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the recovery process starts 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed
32. Size is more than 2 TB or NTFS In the text window you will be able to enter the volume label if necessary by default this window is empty In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system 3 If you click OK to proceed with the Format Volume operation you ll add a pending operation of formatting a volume To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or an 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 9 8 Pending operations All operations which were prepared by the user in manual mode or with the aid of a wizard are considered pending until the user issues the specific command for the changes to be made permanent Until then Acronis Disk Director Lite will only demonstrate the new volume structure that will result from the operations that have been planned to be performed on disks and volumes This approach enables you to control all planned operations double check the intended changes and if necessary cancel operations before they are
33. Target disk lt 2 TB UEFI OS convertible The target disk will be initialized as MBR The recovered disk OS will be automatically converted to support BIOS booting Note If you want to recover the source disk as is 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery UEFI OS non convertible The target disk will be initialized as the source one GPT Additional steps 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery Possible issue If target machine does not support UEFI the system will not boot after recovery Platform BIOS Target disk gt 2 TB The target disk will be initialized as MBR The recovered disk OS will be automatically converted to support BIOS booting Limitation only 2 TB of the disk space will be available for use The target disk will be initialized as the source one GPT Additional steps 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery Possible issue If target machine does not support UEFI the system will not boot after recovery Platform UEFI Target disk lt 2 TB The source disk will be recovered without any modification The source disk will be recovered without any modification Target hardware Platform UEFI Target disk gt 2 TB The source disk will be recovered
34. User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 see the Owners and credentials p 21 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine section 5 2 Acronis Universal Restore Acronis Universal Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that helps recover and boot up an operating system on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Universal Restore is extremely useful in the following scenarios 1 Instant recovery of a failed system on different hardware 2 Hardware independent cloning and deployment of operating systems 3 Physical to physical physical to virtual and virtual to physical machine migration 5 2 1 Getting Universal Restore Universal Restore is always available when recovering a system from the online storage Universal Restore comes free with the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Advanced Server SBS Edition and Virtual Edition Universal Restore for the other product editions is purchased separately It has its own license To enable Universal Restore
35. a machine means backing up all the machine s disks To select individual disks and or volumes expand the machine item and select check boxes next to the disks and or volumes Note for Disks volumes If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 3 Having specified the data to backup click OK 4 2 2 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the data you are going to backup To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the Plan parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 4 2 3 Source files exclusion This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for disk level backup of NTFS and FAT file systems only This option is effective for fil
36. a machine running Linux the net snmp for RHEL and SUSE or the snmpd for Debian package has to be installed SNMP can be configured using the snmpconf command The default configuration files are located in the etc snmp directory etc snmp snmpd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP SNMP agent etc snmp snmptrapd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP trap daemon 10 5 4 3 Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific The preset is Disabled To enable this option select the Log events check box Use the Types of events to log check box to filt
37. and enhanced functionality to better meet the needs of Acronis customers Acronis does not collect any personal data To learn more about the ACEP read the terms of participation on the Acronis Web site or in the product GUI Initially the option is configured during the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 agent installation This setting can be changed at any time using the product GUI Options gt Machine options gt Customer Experience Program The option can also be configured using the Group Policy infrastructure A setting defined by a Group Policy cannot be changed using the product GUI unless the Group Policy is disabled on the machine 10 5 2 Alerts 10 5 2 1 Alert management Remove from Accepted alerts items older than This option defines whether to delete the accepted alerts from the Accepted alerts table The preset is Disabled When enabled you can specify the keeping period for the accepted alerts The accepted alerts older than this period will be deleted from the table automatically Automatically move inactive alerts to Accepted alerts This option defines whether to accept all the alerts that become inactive and move them to the Accepted alerts table automatically The preset is Disabled When enabled you can specify the alert types to apply this option to 10 5 2 2 Time based alerts Last backup This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine p 237 or to the management serv
38. and local backup plans owned by any user registered in the operating system When a user opens a plan or task for editing which is owned by another user all passwords set in the task are cleared This prevents the modify settings leave passwords trick The program displays a warning each time you are trying to edit a plan task last modified by another user On seeing the warning you have two options Click Cancel and create your own plan or task The original task will remain intact Continue editing You will have to enter all credentials required for the plan or task execution Archive owner An archive owner is the user who saved the archive to the destination To be more precise this is the user whose account was specified when creating the backup plan in the Where to back up step By default the plan s credentials are used Plan s credentials and task credentials Any task running on a machine runs on behalf of a user When creating a plan or a task you have the option to explicitly specify an account under which the plan or the task will run Your choice depends on whether the plan or task is intended for manual start or for executing on schedule Manual start You can skip the Plan s Task credentials step Every time you start the task the task will run under the credentials with which you are currently logged on Any person that has administrative privileges on the machine can also start the task The task will run un
39. appears in the system tray The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The immediate user sees the drive tree and icons and can open files or launch applications even though they were not yet recovered The Acronis Active Restore drivers intercept system queries and set the immediate priority for recovery of the files that are necessary to serve the incoming requests While this on the fly recovery proceeds the continuing recovery process is transferred to the background Please do not shut down or reboot the machine until the recovery is completed If you switch off the machine all the changes made to the system since the last boot up would be lost The system will not be recovered not even partially The only possible solution in this case will be to restart the recovery process from a bootable media 6 The background recovery continues until all the selected volumes are recovered the log entry is made and the Acronis Active Restore icon disappears from the system tray 5 5 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine Rather than converting a TIB file to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 performs the conversion by recovery of a disk backup to a fully configured and operational new virtual machine You have the ability to adapt the virtual machine configuration to your needs when configuring the recovery operation
40. as archive owners or the machine name If you accidentally delete the meta folder it will be automatically recreated next time you access the vault But some information like owner names and machine names may be lost 6 1 2 1 Actions on personal vaults To access actions 1 Connect the console to the management server 2 Inthe Navigation pane click Vaults gt Personal All the operations described here are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the vaults toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Vault name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with personal vaults To Do Create a personal vault Click Ea Create The procedure of creating personal vaults is described in depth in the Creating a personal vault p 138 section Edit a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click Edit The Edit personal vault page lets you edit the vault s name and information in the Comments field Change user account Click 4 amp Change user for accessing a vault In the appearing dialog box provide the credentials required for accessing the vault Create Acronis Secure Click E Create Acronis Secure Zone Zone The procedure of creating the Acronis Secure Zone is described in depth in the Creating Acronis Secure Zone p 139 section Explore a vault s Click amp Explore content In the appearing Explorer window examine the selected vault s content Valida
41. backup Image A backup p 228 that contains a sector based copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form Normally only sectors that contain data are copied Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides an option to take a raw image that is copy all the disk sectors which enables imaging of unsupported file systems Disk group A number of dynamic disks p 233 that store the common configuration data in their LDM databases and therefore can be managed as a whole Normally all dynamic disks created within the same machine p 236 are members of the same disk group As soon as the first dynamic disk is created by the LDM or another disk management tool the disk group name can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services dmio Boot Info Primary Disk Group Name The next created or imported disks are added to the same disk group The group exists until at least one of its members exists Once the last dynamic disk is disconnected or converted to basic the group is discontinued though its name is kept in the above registry key In case a dynamic disk is created or connected again a disk group with an incremental name is created When moved to another machine a disk group is considered as foreign and cannot be used until imported into the existing disk group The import updates the configuration data on both the local and the foreign disks so that they form a single entity A foreign group is impo
42. backup plan p 29 Creating a centralized backup plan Recovering data p 97 The main difference is that you select the online storage as the backup destination Host based backups of virtual machines are possible with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Virtual Edition You can back up all virtual machines managed by Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V with a single subscription for virtual machines 11 1 Introduction to Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online This section contains a brief overview of Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online and answers questions that may arise during evaluation and usage of this product 11 1 1 What is Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online is a service that enables you to back up data to Acronis Online Backup Storage To use this service you need to buy a subscription that determines the amount of storage space reserved for your backups storage quota and how long the online service will be available to you A separate subscription is required for each physical machine you are going to back up The server or workstation subscription that you buy will depend on the Windows operating system that the machine is running Other operating systems are not supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Example A 250 GB 1 year workstation subscription means that you can back up data from a machine running a non server Windows operating system for a period of 1 year The bac
43. be created on 1 Choose the Place on the virtualization server that I select option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtualization server Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected server 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page To select the type of virtual machine 1 Choose the Save as files of the VM type that I select to the folder that specify option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtual machine type Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected virtual machine type 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page 5 5 2 Virtual machine settings The following virtual machine settings can be configured Name Default name New virtual machine Enter the name for the new virtual machine Storage Initial setting the default storage of the virtualization server if the new machine is created on the virtualization server Otherwise the current user s documents folder This is the place where the new virtual machine will be created Whether you can change the storage on the virtualization server or not depends on the virtualization product brand and settings VMware ESX may have multiple storages A Microsoft Hyper V server enables creating a new virtual machine in any local folder Memory Initial setting if not contained in the backup it is the default setting of the virtualization server This is the amount of memory allocated to th
44. bootable media Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive in the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sdaz2 Changing volume properties Size and location When recovering a volume to a basic MBR disk you can resize and relocate the volume by dragging it or its borders with a mouse or by entering corresponding values in the appropriate fields Using this feature you can redistribute the disk space between the volumes being recovered In this case you will have to recover the volume to be reduced first Note Volumes backed up using the sector by sector option cannot be resized Tip A volume cannot be resized when being recovered from a backup split into multiple removable media To be able to resize the volume copy all parts of the backup to a single location on a hard disk Type A basic MBR disk can contain up to four primary volumes or up to three primary volumes and multiple logical drives By default the program selects the original volume s type You can change this setting if required Primary Information about primary volumes is contained in the MBR partition table Most operating systems can boot only from the primary volume of
45. by taking resources from the other processes 6 Storing the backed up data 6 1 Vaults A vault is a location for storing backup archives For ease of use and administration a vault is associated with the archives metadata Referring to this metadata makes for fast and convenient operations with archives and backups stored in the vault A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive detachable media or a tape device attached to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Node There are no settings for limiting a vault size or number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Why create vaults We recommend that you create a vault in each destination where you are going to store backup archives This will ease your work as follows Quick access to the vault You will not have to remember paths to the folders where the archives are stored When creating a backup plan or a task that requires selection of an archive or an archive destination place the list of vaults will be available for quick access without drilling down through the folders tree Easy archive management A vault is available for access from the Navigation pane Having selected the vault you can browse the archives stored there and perform the following archive management operations Geta list of backups included in each archive Recov
46. ceswwt eae ESTEE EEEE Es 28 vl 5 ol PBEBEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EEE EE rEEE EE re rr Er Ee ErErErEerEreErEeEere rere rere Ee eE Pere re eErErEEreErEeEErEErerrEreerEerErEreeEEE 29 AD BACKUP iNOW ii ecick ccaes sass cacdsedacevaads oaededasasvands oceeedass evans sodddedasusdaeds secddedess sdaeds sede edeas sbancSeeee es 29 4 2 Cr ating a ack p Pl ai eeeceessisctsiey sates oss cieceisinsiy sale oce decsiee sae vees deceives dees cociiievesanldeocs cotdeevesedeeean cs 29 AQT Selecting data to Sack pris nada 31 4 2 2 Access credentials for SOUrCE csssescescescescescescessssessessesssssessessesseesesaeeaecaecsecaecaecsecaecaecsesaeeaecaesaesaeeaeeas 32 4 2 3 Source files CxCIUSION ccscescescescescesceessseessssesseesesaeeaseassaesaesassaesassaseaesaesaseaecascaesaesaesaesaesaesaesaseaseaseaeegs 32 4 2 4 Access credentials for archive location ccsccsccsssssssessssssessesseesesseesessecsessecsecsecsesaecsecaesaecsesaesaeeaseaesas 34 425 Backup SCHEMES az cdscscscessdscedscscsieccdeassstbsivs seissve sith aaa aaa a anaia aaa aiana aiaa anaiari eaa ira 34 4 2 6 Backup location selection ccccccssccsscessesscesecesscssecsesesecssecsesesecssecsesesscaecsescaecesecseseseceseceaecesesseeseceese 44 4 2 7 Arehiv validati Meroen eanan nena anaana aai aaiae eaa ana aaaea aa adane atg 46 4 2 8 Backup plan s credentials ccccccccsccsscssscsseesecesecssecseeesecssecsesesscsecsesesscsecssscsees
47. clearing the following check boxes Ask for the first media while backing up to removable media This option is effective only when backing up to removable media The option defines whether to display the Insert First Media prompt when backing up to removable media The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled backing up to removable media may be not possible if the user is away because the program will wait for someone to press OK in the prompt box Hence you should disable the prompt when scheduling a backup to removable media Then if the removable media is available for example a DVD is inserted the task can run unattended Reset archive bit The option is effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems and in bootable media The preset is Disabled In Windows operating systems each file has the File is ready for archiving attribute available by selecting File gt Properties gt General gt Advanced gt Archive and Index attributes This attribute also known as the archive bit is set by the operating system each time the file is changed and can be reset by backup applications each time they include the file in a backup The archive bit value is used by various applications such as databases When the Reset archive bit check box is selected Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will reset the archive bits of all files being backed up Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 itself does not use the arch
48. command execution fails the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the Log view 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot 5 7 8 Recovery priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the recovery priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the recovery priority might speed up the recovery process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources to the application that will perform the recovery However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk I O speed or network traffic The preset is Normal To specify the recovery process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resources taken by the recovery process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine Normal to run the recovery process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes High to maximize the recovery process speed
49. disk is non convertible or the source disk contains any boot volumes of the non convertible OSes the boot mode cannot be changed automatically and the software will initialize the target disk as the source one To boot up the target machine you have to turn on off the UEFI mode in BIOS manually Otherwise the system will not boot after recovery The following table summarizes all cases of recovering disks of a BIOS based system to UEFI based and vice versa The plus sign on a green background means that the source disk will be recovered without any limitations The plus sign on a yellow background means that the source disk will be recovered with some limitations To overcome such limitations you might need to perform some additional steps The plus minus signs on a red background means the disk will be recovered but some issues might occur Original Target hardware system Platform BIOS Platform BIOS Platform UEFI Platform UEFI Target disk lt 2 TB Target disk gt 2 TB Target disk lt 2 TB Target disk gt 2 TB Original system BIOS OS convertible BIOS OS non convertible Target hardware Platform BIOS Target disk lt 2 TB The source disk will be recovered without any modification The source disk will be recovered without any modification Platform BIOS Target disk gt 2 TB The target disk will be initialized as MBR Limitation only 2 TB of the disk sp
50. earlier than 4 30 PM and not later than 10 PM Every day at 11 PM the company s servers are backed up So all the users data should be preferably backed up before this time in order to free network bandwidth By specifying the upper limit as 10 PM it is supposed that the backing up of users data does not take more than one hour If a user is still logged on within the specified time interval or logs off at any other time do not back up the users data i e skip task execution Event When logging off The following user Any user m Condition Fits the time interval from 04 30 00 PM until 10 00 00 PM Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 if the user logs off between 04 30 00 PM and 10 00 00 PM the backup task will start immediately following the logging off 2 if the user logs off at any other time the task will be skipped What if What if a task is scheduled to be executed at a certain time and this time is outside the specified time interval For example Event Daily Every 1 day s Once at 03 00 00 PM Condition Fits time interval from 06 00 00 PM until 11 59 59 PM In this case whether and when the task will run depends on the task start conditions If the task start conditions are Skip the task execution the task will never run If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is cleared the task
51. establish whether its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If such transfer with proportional resizing of the source disk volumes is possible but without any data loss then the user will be allowed to proceed If due to the size limitations safe transfer of all the source disk data to the target disk is impossible even with the proportional resizing of the volumes then the Clone basic disk operation will be impossible and the user will not be able to continue If you are about to clone a disk comprising of a system volume pay attention to the Advanced options By clicking Finish you ll add the pending operation of the disk cloning To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Using advanced options When cloning a disk comprising of a system volume you need to retain an operating system bootability on the target disk volume It means that the operating system must have the system volume information e g volume letter matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the se
52. executed To prevent you from performing any unintentional change on your disk the program will first display the list of all pending operations The Disk management view contains the toolbar with icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations These actions might also be launched from the Disk management menu of the console All planned operations are added to the pending operation list The Undo action lets you undo the latest operation in the list While the list is not empty this action is available The Redo action lets you reinstate the last pending operation that was undone The Commit action forwards you to the Pending Operations window where you will be able to view the pending operation list Clicking Proceed will launch their execution You will not be able to undo any actions or operations after you choose the Proceed operation You can also cancel the commitment by clicking Cancel Then no changes will be done to the pending operation list Quitting Acronis Disk Director Lite without committing the pending operations effectively cancels them so if you try to exit Disk management without committing the pending operations you will receive the appropriate warning 10 Administering a managed machine This section describes the views that are available through the navigation tree of the console connected to a managed machine and explains how to work with each view 10 1 Backup plans and ta
53. for details A backup is not deleted until all backups that directly depend on it become subject to deletion as well This is why you might see a weekly or a monthly backup remain in the archive for a few days past its expected expiration date If the schedule starts with a daily or a weekly backup a full backup is created instead Examples Each day of the past week each week of the past month Let us consider a GFS backup scheme that many may find useful Back up files every day including weekends Be able to recover files as of any date over the past seven days Have access to weekly backups of the past month Keep monthly backups indefinitely Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 11 00 PM Back up on All days Weekly monthly Saturday for example Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month m Monthly indefinitely As a result an archive of daily weekly and monthly backups will be created Daily backups will be available for seven days since creation For instance a daily backup of Sunday January 1 will be available through next Sunday January 8 the first weekly backup the one of Saturday January 7 will be stored on the system until February 7 Monthly backups will never be deleted Limited storage If you do not want to arrange a vast amount of space to store a huge archive you may set up a GFS scheme so as to make your backups more short lived at the sa
54. free space from the existing ones exist on the full version of the software so with this version deleting an existing volume sometimes might be the only way to free the necessary disk space without changing the existing disk configuration After a volume is deleted its space is added to unallocated disk space It can be used for creation of a new volume or to change another volume s type If you need to delete a volume 1 Select a hard disk and a volume to be deleted 2 Select Delete volume or a similar item in the Operations sidebar list or click the Delete the selected volume icon on the toolbar If the volume contains any data you will receive the warning that all the information on this volume will be lost irrevocably 3 By clicking OK in the Delete volume window you ll add the pending operation of volume deletion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 9 7 3 Set active volume If you have several primary volumes you must specify one to be the boot volume For this you can set a volume to become active A disk can have only one active volume so if you set a volume as active the volume which was active before will be automatically unset If you need to set a volume active 1 Select a primary volume on a basic MBR disk to set as active 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Ma
55. from Monday through Friday During a workday the task starts only once at 9 PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on lt Workdays gt selecting the lt Workdays gt check box automatically selects the corresponding check boxes Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri and leaves the remaining ones unchanged Once at 09 00 00 PM Effective From empty If you have created the task say on Monday at 11 30 AM the task will be started on the same day at 9 PM If the task was created say on Friday after 9 PM then it will be started for the first time on the nearest workday Monday in our example at 9 PM End date empty The task will be restarted for an indefinite number of weeks This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Workdays like schedule is added to the incremental backups while the full backup is scheduled to be performed one day in the week For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 39 section Several weekly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days of the weeks with different time intervals consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired day of the week or to several days For example you need the task to be run with the following schedule Monday twice at 12 PM noon and 9 PM Tuesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Wednesday eve
56. in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials Note According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 4 2 7 Archive validation Set up the validation task to check if the backed up data is recoverable If the backup could not pass the validation successfully the validation task fails and the backup plan gets the Error status To set up validation specify the following parameters 1 When to validate select when to perform the validation As the validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule the validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if the validation is a major part of your data protection strategy and you prefer to be immediately informed whether the backed up data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered think of starting the validation right after backup cre
57. label are also immediately displayed in the view 9 6 Disk operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on disks Disk Initialization p 174 initializes the new hardware added to the system Basic disk cloning p 175 transfers complete data from the source basic MBR disk to the target Disk conversion MBR to GPT p 177 converts an MBR partition table to GPT Disk conversion GPT to MBR p 178 converts a GPT partition table to MBR Disk conversion Basic to Dynamic p 178 converts a basic disk to dynamic Disk conversion Dynamic to Basic p 179 converts a dynamic disk to basic The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with disks Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target disk This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the disk cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this disk and start again If you cannot determine which applications use the disk close them all 9 6 1 Disk initialization If you add any new disk to your machine Acronis Disk Director Lite will notice the configuration change and scan the added disk to include it to the disk and volume list If the disk is still not initialized or possibly has a file structure unknown to t
58. lt login gt tags include the user name and the lt password gt tags include the user password To modify credentials change the lt Login gt and lt password gt tags in the corresponding sections plan s credentials the lt plan gt lt options gt lt common_parameters gt section access credentials for the backed up data the lt plan gt lt targets gt lt inclusions gt section access credentials for the backup destination the lt plan gt lt locations gt section Pay special attention to modifying the lt password gt tag The tag that contains an encrypted password looks like lt password encrypted true gt lt password gt To change the encrypted password 1 Inthe command line run the acronis_encrypt utility acronis_encrypt UserPassword 1 here UserPassword 1 is the password you want to encrypt The utility outputs a string for example XXXYYYZZZ888 Copy this string and paste it into the tag as follows lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt The acronis_encrypt utility is available on any machine where Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console is installed The path to the utility is as follows ProgramFiles Common Files Acronis Utils in 32 bit Windows ProgramFiles x86 Common Files Acronis Utils in 64 bit Windows m usr sbin in Linux How to make a backup plan use the agent s credentials Before importing or deploying the export file delete the value of the requi
59. monitor the dedicated folder To change the path edit the key The change will be applied after a restart of the agent In Linux The default path to the dedicated folder is usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import The path is stored in the file etc Acronis BackupAndRecovery config To change the path edit the usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import value in the following tag lt key name Settings gt lt value name ImportFolderPath type TString gt usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery import lt value gt lt key gt The change will be applied after a restart of the agent The absence of the tag means that the agent does not monitor the dedicated folder 10 1 5 Backup plan details The Backup plan details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates all information on the selected backup plan The respective message will appear at the top of the tabs if execution of the plan requires user interaction The message contains a brief description of the problem and action buttons that let you select the appropriate action or stop the plan Details The Backup plans and tasks tab provides the following general information on the selected plan Name name of the backup plan Origin whether the plan was created directly on the machine local origin or deployed to the machine from the management server centralized origin Execution state execution state p 190 of the backup plan
60. notification 1 Inthe SMTP server field enter the name of the SMTP server 2 Inthe Port field set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 3 Inthe User name filed enter the user name 4 Inthe Password field enter the password 5 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows then click OK From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name enter the user name Password enter the password 6 Click OK 10 5 3 1 Alert notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the ability of notifying users about alerts by e mail This option enables you to specify when and how often to receive notifications about the certain types of alerts The preset is Disabled Note Before configuring al
61. of the following Click Writing speed stated as a percentage of the maximum speed of the destination hard disk and then drag the slider or select a percentage in the box Click Writing speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the writing speed in kilobytes per second 4 7 4 3 Network connection speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when a location on the network network share managed vault or an FTP SFTP server is selected as the backup destination The option defines the amount of network connection bandwidth allocated for transferring the backup data By default the speed is set to maximum i e the software uses all the network bandwidth it can get when transferring the backup data Use this option to reserve a part of the network bandwidth to other network activities The preset is Maximum To set the network connection speed for backup Do any of the following Click Transferring speed stated as a percentage of the estimated maximum speed of the network connection and then drag the slider or type a percentage in the box Click Transferring speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the bandwidth limit for transferring backup data in kilobytes per second 4 7 5 Backup splitting This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines how a backup can be split The
62. on a managed machine do any of the following Install Universal Restore from the product installation package in addition to Agent for Windows Agent for Linux or Bootable Media Builder Ifthe agent is already installed you can connect the management console to the machine click Help gt Change license and specify the license key or the license server from where to take the Universal Restore license You need to re create bootable media to make the newly installed add on operational in the bootable environment 5 2 2 Using Universal Restore During recovery Universal Restore is available when configuring a disk or volume recovery if a Windows or Linux operating system is present in your selection of disks or volumes If there are more than one operating systems in your selection you can apply Universal Restore to all Windows systems all Linux systems or to both Windows and Linux systems If the software cannot detect whether an operating system is present in the backup it suggests using Universal Restore on the off chance of the system presence These cases are as follows the backup is split into several files the backup is located in a deduplicating vault in Acronis Online Backup Storage on an FTP SFTP server tape CD or DVD Sometimes Universal Restore is applied in the background because the software knows what drivers or modules are required for the supported virtual machines These cases are as follows r
63. on the managed machine is changed by at least 1 GB but only if all users are logged off and more than 12 hours have passed since the last backup Set the schedule conditions and the Task start conditions backup option as follows Schedule When free space changed Value Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB Condition User logged off Value Run the task on schedule only if all users are logged off Condition Time since last backup Value Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met If the free space changes by more than 1 GB the scheduler will wait until both conditions are met at the same time and then run the backup task 4 4 6 1 User is idle Applies to Windows User is idle means that a screen saver is running on the managed machine or the machine is locked Example Run the backup task on the managed machine every day at 9PM preferably when the user is idle If the user is still active by 11PM run the task anyway Event Daily every 1 day s Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition User is idle Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 2 hour s As a result 1 If the user becomes idle before 9PM the backup task will start at 9PM 2 If the user becomes idle between 9PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user becomes idle 3 If the user is still active at 11
64. ona hard disk drive Acronis uploads the backup to the online storage After that you can add incremental backups to this full backup either manually or on a schedule Large Scale Recovery An extra service that enables you to obtain a copy of the backups you have in the online storage You can then recover data from this copy License Not to be confused with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 product license Permission for a machine to use an extra service of Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online You can buy Initial Seeding licenses and or Large Scale Recovery licenses Reassign a subscription Assign a subscription that is already activated to a different machine Registration code A character string for registering a subscription or license that was bought from an Acronis partner When you purchase such subscriptions or licenses you receive a confirmation e mail containing the registration codes for each of them You then enter the registration codes on the account management Web page and these subscriptions and licenses become available for use Renew a subscription Assign a subscription that has the same storage quota as the current activated subscription This subscription will become activated as soon as the current subscription expires Storage quota The amount of storage space that a machine can use according to the subscription Subscription Permission for a machine to use a specific amount of space in the online st
65. one backup plan one archive Doing the opposite will not prevent the program from functioning but is not practical or efficient except for some specific cases Why two or more plans should not back up to the same archive 1 Backing up different sources to the same archive makes it difficult to use archive When it comes to recovery every second counts and you might be lost in the archive content Backup plans that operate with the same archive should back up the same data items say both plans back up volume C 2 Applying multiple retention rules to an archive makes the archive content unpredictable Since each of the rules will be applied to the entire archive the backups belonging to one backup plan can be easily deleted along with the backups belonging to the other You should not expect the classic behavior of the GFS and Tower of Hanoi backup schemes Normally each complex backup plan should back up to its own archive 4 2 6 1 Selecting backup destinations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 lets you back up data to various physical storages Destination ey Online backup storage Personal Machine oy Local folders CD DVD etc E Tape device Network folders Details To back up data to Acronis Online Backup Storage click Log in and specify the credentials to log in to the online storage Then expand the Online backup storage group and select the account Prior to backing up to the online
66. one task has Identify the failed tasks gt Check the tasks log to find out failed the reason of the failure then do one or more of the Otherwise see 2 following Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure if a local plan has failed Edit the centralized backup plan on the management server if a centralized plan has failed At least one task has View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform succeeded with actions to prevent the future warnings or failure warnings Otherwise see 3 3 All the tasks are No action is required Note that a backup plan can be OK if completed successfully none of the tasks has been started yet 10 1 2 3 Task states A task can be in one of the following states Idle Waiting Running Need interaction The initial task state is Idle Once the task is started manually or the event specified by the schedule occurs the task enters either the Running state or the Waiting state Running A task changes to the Running state when the event specified by the schedule occurs AND all the conditions set in the backup plan are met AND no other task that locks the necessary resources is running In this case nothing prevents the task from running Waiting A task changes to the Waiting state when the task is about to start but another task using the same resources is already running In particu
67. partitions requires a reboot Reducing a system volume to the minimum size might prevent the machine s operating system from booting 4 Click OK 6 2 2 2 Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone To decrease Acronis Secure Zone 1 Onthe Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Decrease 2 Select volumes that will receive free space after the zone is decreased 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and minimum values The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field 4 Click OK 6 2 2 3 Deleting Acronis Secure Zone To delete Acronis Secure Zone 1 On the Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Delete 2 Inthe Delete Acronis Secure Zone window select volumes to which you want to add the space freed from the zone and then click OK If you select several volumes the space will be distributed proportionally to each partition If you do not select any volume the freed space becomes unallocated After you click OK Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will start deleting the zone 7 Operations with archives and backups 7 1 Validating archives and backups Validation is an operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk or volume b
68. possible disk and volume structure damage or data loss please take all necessary precautions and follow these simple rules 1 Back up the disk on which volumes will be created or managed Having your most important data backed up to another hard disk network share or removable media will allow you to work on disk volumes being reassured that your data is safe 2 Test your disk to make sure it is fully functional and does not contain bad sectors or file system errors 3 Do not perform any disk volume operations while running other software that has low level disk access Close these programs before running Acronis Disk Director Lite With these simple precautions you will protect yourself against accidental data loss 9 3 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows or start it from a bootable media Running Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows If you run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console and connect it to a managed machine the Disk management view will be available in the Navigation tree of the console with which you can start Acronis Disk Director Lite Running Acronis Disk Director Lite from a bootable media You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite on a bare metal on a machine that cannot boot or ona non Windows machine To do so boot the machine from a bootable media p 229 created with the Acronis Bootable Media Builder run the management console and then c
69. refer to GFS backup scheme I Image The same as Disk backup p 233 Incremental backup A backup p 228 that stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive p 228 to restore data from an incremental backup Indexing An activity p 228 performed by a storage node p 239 after a backup p 228 has been saved to a deduplicating vault p 232 During indexing the storage node performs the following operations Moves data blocks from the backup to a special file within the vault This file is called the deduplication data store Inthe backup replaces the moved blocks with their fingerprints hashes Saves the hashes and the links that are necessary to assemble the deduplicated data to the deduplication database Indexing can be thought of as deduplication at target as opposed to deduplication at source which is performed by the agent p 228 during the backup operation p 228 A user can suspend and resume indexing L Local backup plan A backup plan p 229 created on a managed machine p 237 using direct management p 232 Local task A task p 239 created on a managed machine p 237 using direct management p 232 Logical volume This term has two meanings depending on the context Avolume information about which is stored in the extended partition table In contrast to a primary volume information about which is st
70. s date Since consolidation may take a lot of time and system resources retention rules provide an option to not delete backups with dependencies In our example the full backup will be retained until the incremental one also becomes obsolete Then both backups will be deleted D Data catalog Allows a user to easily find the required version of data and select it for recovery On a managed machine p 237 users can view and search data in any vault p 240 accessible from this machine The centralized catalog available on the management server p 237 contains all data stored on its storage nodes p 239 Physically data catalog is stored in catalog files Every vault uses its own set of catalog files which normally are located directly in the vault If this is not possible such as for tape storages the catalog files are stored in the managed machine s or storage node s local folder Also a storage node locally stores catalog files of its remote vaults for the purpose of fast access Deduplicating vault A managed vault p 237 in which deduplication p 232 is enabled Deduplication A method of storing different duplicates of the same information only once Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 can apply the deduplication technology to backup archives p 228 stored on storage nodes p 239 This minimizes storage space taken by the archives backup traffic and network usage during backup Differential backup A differentia
71. section for the list of available events the scheduler checks the specified condition and executes the task if the condition is met The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 94 backup option There you can specify how important the conditions are for the backup strategy conditions are obligatory put the backup task run on hold until all the conditions are met conditions are preferable but a backup task run has higher priority put the task on hold for the specified time interval If the time interval lapses and the conditions are still not met run the task anyway With this setting the program will automatically handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is undesirable backup task start time matters skip the backup task if the conditions are not met at the time when the task should be started Skipping the task run makes sense when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time especially if the events are relatively often Conditions are available only when the custom backup scheme p 39 is used You can set conditions for full incremental and differential backup separately Adding multiple conditions Multiple conditions must be met simultaneously to enable task execution Example It is required to run the backup task after free space
72. select the respective check box es To ensure that you choose the right backup click on the backup and look at the bottom table that displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then select Information 2 Click OK 7 2 3 Access credentials for source Specify credentials required for access to the location where the source archive or the backup is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 7 2 4 Destination selection Specify a destination where the exported object will be stored Exporting backu
73. start again If you can not determine which applications use the volume close them all 9 7 1 Creating a volume You might need a new volume to Recover a previously saved backup copy in the exactly as was configuration Store collections of similar files separately for example an MP3 collection or video files on a separate volume Store backups images of other volumes disks on a special volume Install a new operating system or swap file on a new volume Add new hardware to a machine In Acronis Disk Director Lite the tool for creating volumes is the Create volume Wizard 9 7 1 1 Types of dynamic volumes Simple Volume A volume created from free space on a single physical disk It can consist of one region on the disk or several regions virtually united by the Logical Disk Manager LDM It provides no additional reliability no speed improvement nor extra size Spanned Volume A volume created from free disk space virtually linked together by the LDM from several physical disks Up to 32 disks can be included into one volume thus overcoming the hardware size limitations but if at least one disk fails all data will be lost and no part of a spanned volume may be removed without destroying the entire volume So a spanned volume provides no additional reliability nor a better I O rate Striped Volume A volume also sometimes called RAID 0 consisting of equal sized stripes of data written across ea
74. systems In archives store encrypted files in a decrypted state This option defines whether to decrypt files before saving them to a backup archive The preset is Disabled Simply ignore this option if you do not use the encryption Enable the option if encrypted files are included in the backup and you want them to be accessed by any user after recovery Otherwise only the user who encrypted the files folders will be able to read them Decryption may also be useful if you are going to recover encrypted files on a different machine File encryption is available in Windows using the NTFS file system with the Encrypting File System EFS To access a file or folder encryption setting select Properties gt General gt Advanced Attributes gt Encrypt contents to secure data Preserve file security settings in archives This option defines whether to back up NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled files and folders are saved in the archive with the original permissions to read write or execute the files for each user or user group If you recover a secured file folder on a machine without the user account specified in the permissions you may not be able to read or modify this file To completely eliminate this kind of problem disable preserving file security settings in archives The recovered files and folders will always inherit the permissions from the folder to which th
75. task 7 1 1 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the archive location in the Path field or select the required location in the tree p 100 When operating on a machine booted with bootable media To access a managed vault type the following string in the Path field bsp node_address vault_name To access an unmanaged centralized vault type the full path to the vault s folder In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 7 1 2 Backup selection To specify a backup to validate 1 In the upper pane select a backup by its creation date time The bottom part of the window displays the selected backup content assisting you to find the right backup Click OK 7 1 3 Vault selection To select a vault or a location 1 Enter the full path to the vault location in the Path field or select the desired location in the tree To select a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the appropriate vault To select a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the appropriate vault To select a local folder CD DVD drive or loca
76. tasks run The plan will not start on a machine where a user account with identical credentials does not exist To avoid this situation do one of the following m Create an account with identical credentials on the second machine Edit credentials in the export file before importing For details see Editing the export file p 194 Edit credentials after importing the plan When creating a backup plan with manual start do not change the Run under the current user setting in Plan parameters gt Show task credentials comments label With this setting the plan s tasks will always run under the account of the user who starts them Steps to perform To export a backup plan 1 Select a backup plan in the Backup plans and tasks view 2 Click Export 3 Specify the path and name of the export file 4 Confirm your choice To import a backup plan 1 Click A Import in the Backup plans and tasks view 2 Specify the path and name of the export file 3 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will show the Edit backup plan page In most cases you need to update the plan s credentials and the access credentials to the backup destination Make the necessary changes and click Save Otherwise click Cancel and the plan will be imported as is 10 1 3 1 Editing the export file The export file is an xml file and can be edited with a text editor Here is how to make some useful changes How to modify credentials In the export file the
77. the boot partition in Linux should have at least 100 MB of free space to activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Unless you use the GRUB boot loader and it is installed in the Master Boot Record MBR Acronis Startup Recovery Manager activation overwrites the MBR with its own boot code Thus you may need to reactivate third party boot loaders if they are installed Under Linux when using a boot loader other than GRUB such as LILO consider installing it to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of the MBR before activating Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Otherwise reconfigure the boot loader manually after the activation Do not activate Disables boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or the menu item in GRUB If Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is not activated you will need one of the following to recover the system when it fails to boot boot the machine from a separate bootable rescue media use network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Services RIS 9 Disk management Acronis Disk Director Lite is a tool for preparing a machine disk volume configuration for recovering the volume images saved by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 software Sometimes after the volume has been backed up and its image placed into a safe storage the machine disk configuration might change due to a HDD replacement or hardware loss In such case with the help o
78. the agent residing on the machine These include personal vaults locally attached tape devices removable media and in the advanced product versions managed and unmanaged centralized vaults When the console is connected to a management server two export methods are available Export from a managed vault The export is performed by the storage node that manages the vault The destination can be a network share or a local folder of the storage node Export from an unmanaged centralized vault The export is performed by the agent installed on the managed machine you specify The destination can be any location accessible to the agent including a managed vault Tip When configuring export to a deduplicating managed vault choose a machine where the deduplication add on to the agent is installed Otherwise the export task will fail Operations with an export task An export task starts immediately after you complete its configuration An export task can be stopped or deleted in the same way as any other task Once the export task is completed you can run it again at any time Before doing so delete the archive that resulted from the previous task run if the archive still exists in the destination vault Otherwise the task will fail You cannot edit an export task to specify another name for the destination archive this is a limitation Tip You can implement the staging scenario manually by regularly running the archive de
79. the asterisks and question marks wildcards As a result in the Search window you will see the list of backed up data items whose names fully or partially coincide with the entered value If the list of matches is too long you can refine the search criteria by specifying the date or time range of backup creation and the size range of backed up items When the required data is found select it and click OK to return to the Data catalog Data view 5 Use the Versions list to select the point of time to revert the data to By default the data will be reverted to latest point of time available for the time period selected in step 3 6 Having selected the required data click Recover and configure the parameters of the recovery operation What if the data does not appear in the catalog or data view The probable reasons of the issue are as follows Wrong time period is set The required data was not backed up during the time period set by the Display data backed up for control Solution Try to increase the time period Cataloging is turned off If the data is displayed partially or is not displayed at all most likely the backup cataloging option p 79 was disabled during backup Solutions Run the cataloging manually by clicking Catalog now For the Data catalog all backups stored in the managed vaults will be cataloged For the Data view only the backups stored on the selected vault will be cataloged The backups t
80. the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 in its log Example of varbind values 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Information 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 10064000B Supported operations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 supports only TRAP operations It is not possible to manage Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 using GET and SET requests This means that you need to use an SNMP Trap receiver to receive TRAP messages About the management information base MIB The MIB file acronis abr mib is located in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 installation directory By default ProgramFiles Acronis BackupAndRecovery in Windows and usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery in Linux This file can be read by a MIB browser or a simple text editor such as Notepad or vi About the test message When configuring SNMP notifications you can send a test message to check if your settings are correct The parameters of the test message are as follows Type of event OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Value Unknown Text description of the event OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 Value 200000000 4 Backup 4 1 Back up now Use the Back up now feature to configure and run a one time backup in a few simple steps The backup process will start immediately after you perform the required steps and click OK For a long time backup strategy that includes schedules and conditions timely deleting
81. the first hard disk but the number of primary volumes is limited If you are going to recover a system volume to a basic MBR disk select the Active check box Active volume is used for loading an operating system Choosing active for a volume without an installed operating system could prevent the machine from booting You cannot set a logical drive or dynamic volume active Logical Information about logical volumes is located not in the MBR but in the extended partition table The number of logical volumes on a disk is unlimited A logical volume cannot be set as active If you recover a system volume to another hard disk with its own volumes and operating system you will most likely need only the data In this case you can recover the volume as logical to access the data only File system By default the recovered volume will have the same file system as the original volume has You can change the volume s file system during recovery if required Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 can make the following file system conversions FAT 16 gt FAT 32 and Ext2 gt Ext3 For volumes with other native file systems this option is not available Assume you are going to recover a volume from an old low capacity FAT16 disk to a newer disk FAT16 would not be effective and might even be impossible to set on the high capacity hard disk That s because FAT16 supports volumes up to 4 GB so you will not be able to recover a 4 GB FAT16 volume t
82. the machine If you need to leave an NT signature Click to clear the Copy NT signature check box if necessary Click to clear the Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box if necessary Click Finish to add the pending operation Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window oP WN Wait until the operation is finished 9 6 3 Disk conversion MBR to GPT You would want to convert an MBR basic disk to a GPT basic disk in the following cases fyou need more than 4 primary volumes on one disk If you need additional disk reliability against any possible data damage If you need to convert a basic MBR disk to basic GPT 1 Select a basic MBR disk to convert to GPT 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to GPT in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert MBR into GPT 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of MBR to GPT disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Please note A GPT partitioned disk reserves the space in the end of the partitioned area necessary for the backup area which stores copies of the GPT header and the partition table If the disk is full and the volume size cannot be automatically decreased the conversion operation of the MBR disk to
83. the machine to which you want to assign an activated subscription go to the subscription activation window 2 From Activated subscriptions select the activated subscription that you want to reassign to the machine 3 Click Activate now Example The diagram below shows what happens if you reassign a subscription to a different machine Let s assume Machine 1 has four backups in Subscription 1 Machine 2 has two backups in Subscription 2 At that point you reassign Subscription 1 to Machine 2 Machine 2 does its third backup to Subscription 1 Depending on your settings this backup will be either full or incremental But its size is not likely to be less than a full backup size Therefore it is not practical to reassign a subscription to a machine whose first backup was done as an initial seeding You will need to either redo the initial seeding which requires a new license or to transfer the sizeable backup over the Internet Machine 1 Machine 2 Online vault Subscription 1 Subscription 2 M2 Backup 1 me ee we we ee ae ie i i o o o a All earlier created backups remain intact You can delete them manually if necessary Keep in mind though backups can be deleted from a subscription only by the machine to which the subscription is assigned In our example you have the following options Before reassigning Delete backups from Subscription 1 using Machine 1 if it is available and turned on Delete backups from Subscr
84. the recovery procedure Exploring images Exploring mounted volumes lets you view and modify if mounted in the read write mode the volume s content To explore a mounted volume select it in the table and click Q Explore The default file manager window opens allowing the user to examine the mounted volume contents Unmounting images Maintaining the mounted volumes takes considerable system resources It is recommended that you unmount the volumes after the necessary operations are completed If not unmounted manually a volume will remain mounted until the operating system restarts To unmount an image select it in the table and click 2 Unmount To unmount all the mounted volumes click Z Unmount all 7 4 Operations available in vaults By using vaults you can easily access archives and backups and perform archive management operations To perform operations with archives and backups 1 Inthe Navigation pane select the vault whose archives you need to manage 2 Inthe vault view select the Archive view tab This tab displays all archives stored in the selected vault 3 Proceed as described in Operations with archives p 155 Operations with backups p 156 7 4 1 Operations with archives To perform any operation with an archive 1 Inthe Navigation pane select the vault that contains archives 2 On the Archive view tab of the vault select the archive If the archive is protected with a password you will be
85. three months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 day s 2 Every 3 hours From 12 00 00 AM midnight Until 09 00 00 PM thus the task will be performed 8 times a day with a 3 hour time interval After the last daily recurrence at 9 PM the next day comes and the task starts over again from midnight 3 Effective From 09 15 2009 If September 15 2009 is the current date of the task s creation and say 01 15 PM is the task s creation time the task will be started when the nearest time interval comes at 03 00 PM in our example To 12 15 2009 On this date the task will be performed for the last time but the task itself is still available in the Tasks view Several daily schedules for one task There are some cases when you might need the task to be run several times a day or even several times a day with different time intervals For such cases consider adding several schedules to a single task For example suppose that the task has to be run every 3rd day starting from 09 20 2009 five times a day first at 8 AM second at 12 PM noon third at 3 PM fourth at 5 PM fifth at 7PM The obvious way is to add five simple schedules If you spend one minute for examination you can think out a more optimal way As you can see the time interval between the first and the second task s recurrences is 4 hours and between the third fourth and fifth is 2 hours In this case the o
86. to send notification when the backup task has completed successfully When backup fails to send a notification when the backup task has failed When user interaction is required to send to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required 3 For the e mail message to include the log entries related to the backup select the Add full log to the notification check box 4 Inthe E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons In the Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default value In the SMTP server field enter the name of the SMTP server In the Port field set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 8 Inthe User name field enter the user name 9 Inthe Password field enter the password 10 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure the additional e mail parameters as follows a From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address b Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection c Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Lo
87. user to select a disk if its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If there is some data on the disk that was chosen as the target the user will receive a warning The selected target disk is not empty The data on its volumes will be overwritten meaning that all the data currently located on the chosen target disk will be lost irrevocably 9 6 2 2 Cloning method and advanced options The Clone basic disk operation usually means that the information from the source disk is transferred to the target As is So if the destination disk is the same size and even if it is larger it is possible to transfer all the information there exactly as it is stored at the source But with the wide range of available hardware it is normal that the target disk would differ in size from the source If the destination is larger then it would be advisable to resize the source disk volumes to avoid leaving unallocated space on the target disk by selecting the Proportionally resize volumes option The option to Clone basic disk as is remains but the default method of cloning will be carried out with proportional enlargement of all the source disk volumes so that no unallocated space remains on the target disk If the destination is smaller then the As is option of cloning will be unavailable and proportional resizing of the source disk volumes will be mandatory The program analyzes the target disk to
88. user has permissions to access but without using a file level backup snapshot Create backup plans and tasks and manage them View but not manage backup plans and tasks created by other users View the local event log Administrative users A user who has administrative privileges on the machine such as a member of the Administrators or Backup Operators group additionally has the following management rights Back up and recover the entire machine or any data on the machine with or without using a disk snapshot Members of the Administrators group also can View and manage backup plans and tasks owned by any user on the machine 3 3 Full incremental and differential backups Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the capability to use popular backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi as well as to create custom backup schemes All backup schemes are based on full incremental and differential backup methods The term scheme in fact denotes the algorithm of applying these methods plus the algorithm of the archive cleanup Comparing backup methods with each other does not make much sense because the methods work as a team in a backup scheme Each method should play its specific role according to its advantages A competent backup scheme will benefit from the advantages of all backup methods and lessen the influence of all the methods shortcomings For example weekly differential backu
89. with Logical Volume Manager LVM the appropriate alignment is set up automatically When recovering basic MBR and GPT volumes you can select the alignment method manually if the automatic alignment does not satisfy you for some reason The following options are available Select automatically Default recommended The software will automatically set the appropriate alignment based on the source and target disk volume properties Use the following options only if you absolutely need to CHS 63 sectors select this option if the recovered volume will be used under Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 or earlier on disks having 512 bytes per physical sector VMWare VMFS 64 KB select this option when recovering the volume as a VMware Virtual Machine File System partition Vista alignment 1 MB select this option if the recovered volume will be used under Windows operating systems starting from Windows Vista or when recovering volumes to an HDD or SSD drive that has a 4 KB sector size Custom Specify the volume alignment manually It is recommended that the value be a multiple of the physical sector size Logical drive letter for Windows only By default the first unused letter will be assigned to the volume To assign other letter select the desired letter from a drop down list If you select the empty value no letter will be assigned to the recovered volume hiding it from the OS You should not assign l
90. without any modification The source disk will be recovered without any modification In most of the current motherboards there is a BIOS compatibility mode So if the system does not find any UEFI boot loader it will try to boot system in BIOS mode 5 4 Acronis Active Restore Active Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started Customers familiar with Acronis Recovery for Microsoft Exchange can note that this product uses Active Restore to achieve immediate availability of an Exchange information store after starting the recovery While based on the same technology recovery of the Information Store proceeds in quite a different way than the operating system recovery described in this section Supported operating systems Acronis Active Restore is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Limitation The only supported archive location is a local drive or more precisely any device available through the machine s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive How it works When configuring a recovery operation you select disks or volumes to recover from a backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 scans the selected disks or volumes in the backup If this scan finds a supported operating system the Acronis Active Restore option becomes available If you do not enable t
91. 0 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of days Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Simple daily schedule Run the task every day at 6PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 day s 2 Once at 06 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set The task will be started on the current day if it has been created before 6PM If you have created the task after 6 PM the task will be started for the first time on the next day at 6 PM To not set The task will be performed for an indefinite number of days Three hour time interval lasting for three months schedule Run the task every three hours The task starts on a certain date say September 15 2009 and ends after
92. 11 1 3 How long will my backups be kept in the online storage ccccsesesecseesecseeseeseesececeeeseceseeseeaes 209 TEIA Howto SECURE MY Gata P r ee EA Sones ledtevaces stesdds testes dtynd dia des dene steaddte tevendustevecoeeieve 209 11 1 5 Backup and recovery FAQ cccscscscsscesseeesecsecsecsecsecsecessecsecsecsecsecsessessessecsecseesessecsecsesaesaesaesaesaesaesags 209 41 1 6 Initial Seeding FAQinsirotn a aa aa aaao Ea a iar aa Para sas R a 210 11 1 7 Large Scale Recovery FAQ Li ec izcicciveecsccivedincccusacaasaasdasaeaacsdaasdacdandsdastdavasclinesdactanasdadasiessddetereccderseadetecees 215 11 18 lt S bseription lifecyele FAQ in 6 AGA A AMADA RAN AA ARRAS A A atta ehh 217 112 Whereido lStart eriei ii oE A RR RRT R RR ROR RR RTR 220 11 3 Choosing a SUDSCHIPTION eeczevcsesesss cesonssesssesescceceseseseeesaceceuabesesesesatacauauesseeseticesavdsessteesiesesases 220 11 4 Activating online backup subscriptions cccccccccccsssssseseeecceeceaeesseeeeeeeeesaaaaeseeeeeeeessaaaaess 221 TEAT Activating SUDSCrIptIONS orreri irean rra A AAEN EASRA eis vada ide EAA E R NAPORE SENAR SEEE 221 11 4 2 Activating SUDSCIIPTIONS ccccsccsceseeseesecssesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsessesaecsecsecsecaecsecaesaesaessesaesaesaesaesansansags 222 11 4 3 Reassigning an activated subscription ccscsccssessssesseeseesecsecsecsecsessecseesecsecsecsessessecsecsecaessecsesaesaeaes 222 11 5 Config ring Proxy Settings ion
93. 2 5 6 Manual start With the Manual start scheme you do not have to specify the backup schedule You can run the backup plan from the Plans and Tasks view manually at any time afterwards Specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup type Select the type of backup Full selected by default for all backup locations except for Acronis Online Backup Storage Incremental At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental Selected as the one and only backup type for Acronis Online Backup Storage Differential At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be differential 4 2 5 7 Initial seeding This backup scheme is only available when you have an Initial Seeding license and selected the Online Backup Storage as the backup destination Initial seeding enables you to transfer the first backup which is full and usually the largest to the online storage on a hard drive instead of over the Internet Subsequent backups which are all incremental and thus usually much smaller can be transferred over the Internet after the full backup has arrived in the online storage If you back up a large amount of data initial seeding ensures faster delivery of the backed up data and lower traffic costs Please refer to the Initial Seeding FAQ p 210 section for more details 4 2 6 Backup location selection Specify where the archive will be stored 1 Selecting th
94. 4 Acronis Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Update 0 User Guide Applies to the following editions O Advanced Server Virtual Edition Advanced Server SBS Edition Advanced Workstation Server for Linux Server for Windows Workstation Aiea Boo Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2011 All rights reserved Acronis and Acronis Secure Zone are registered trademarks of Acronis Inc Acronis Compute with Confidence Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Active Restore and the Acronis logo are trademarks of Acronis Inc Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds VMware and VMware Ready are trademarks and or registered trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Distribution of substantively modified versions of this document is prohibited without the explicit permission of the copyright holder Distribution of this work or derivative work in any standard paper book form for commercial purposes is prohibited unless prior permission is obtained from the copyright holder DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEP
95. Connected to This Machine Local Connection as Administrator MACHINE14 l x k we G jo Qconecty jf acione QToos a Navigations G optonsy Hepy 2 Acronis Navigation Welcome to Machine14 Shortlist Full list The console is connected to the managed machine Choose the action to perform or the tool to use 4 Machine14 Backup plans and tasks t Back up now BD vouts amp Specify backup locati d sta m Log Kd Aarts ical Create backup plan BB Tepe management E Create a backup plan to protect data on the machine Disk management 4 Recover Shortcuts Recover the data from ec EB Local machine Machine 14 Recent alerts ve There are no alerts Recent activities 27 There are no items to show in this view Next backup There are no backup tasks Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console Welcome screen Key elements of the console workspace Name Description 1 Navigation pane Contains the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar Lets you navigate to the different views For details see Navigation pane p 14 2 Main area Here you configure and monitor backup recovery and other operations The main area displays views and action pages p 15 depending on the items selected in the menu or Navigation tree amp Menu bar Appears across the top of the program window Lets you perform most of operations available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 The menu items change dynamically depend
96. GPT will fail The operation is irreversible If you have a primary volume belonging to an MBR disk and convert the disk first to GPT and then back to MBR the volume will be logical and will not be able to be used as a system volume If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks the reverse conversion of the disk to MBR is also possible through the same menu items the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR Dynamic disk conversion MBR to GPT Acronis Disk Director Lite does not support direct MBR to GPT conversion for dynamic disks However you can perform the following conversions to reach the goal using the program 1 MBR disk conversion dynamic to basic p 179 using the Convert to basic operation 2 Basic disk conversion MBR to GPT using the Convert to GPT operation 3 GPT disk conversion basic to dynamic p 178 using the Convert to dynamic operation 9 6 4 Disk conversion GPT to MBR If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks conversion of the GPT disk to MBR is possible the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR If you need to convert a GPT disk to MBR 1 Select a GPT disk to convert to MBR 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to MBR in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert GPT into MBR You will be explained the changes that will happen to the system after the chosen dis
97. LO loaders you will need to correct the GRUB configuration files If the number of the Linux root partition has changed it is also recommended that you change etc fstab so that the SWAP volume can be accessed correctly Linux was recovered from an LVM volume backup to a basic MBR disk Such system cannot boot because its kernel tries to mount the root file system at the LVM volume Solution Change the loader configuration and etc fstab so that the LVM is not used and reactivate the boot loader 5 6 1 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration Generally you should refer to the boot loader manual pages for the appropriate procedure There is also the corresponding Knowledge Base article on the Acronis Web site The following is an example of how to reactivate GRUB in case the system disk volume is recovered to identical hardware 1 Start Linux or boot from the bootable media and then press CTRL ALT F2 10 11 12 Mount the system you are recovering mkdir mnt system mount t ext3 dev sda2 mnt system root partition mount t ext3 dev sdal1 mnt system boot boot partition Mount the proc and dev file systems to the system you are recovering mount t proc none mnt system proc mount o bind dev mnt system dev Save a copy of the GRUB menu file by running one of the following commands cp mnt system boot grub menu 1lst mnt system boot grub menu 1st backup or cp mnt system boot grub grub con
98. PM the backup task starts anyway 4 4 6 2 Location s host is available Applies to Windows Linux Location s host is available means that the machine hosting the destination for storing archives on a networked drive is available Example Backing up data to the networked location is performed on workdays at 9 00 PM If the location s host is not available at that moment for instance due to maintenance work skip the backup and wait for the next workday to start the task It is assumed that the backup task should not be started at all rather than failed Event Weekly Every 1 week s on lt workdays gt Once at 09 00 00 PM Condition Location s host is available Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 If 9 00 PM comes and the location s host is available the backup task starts right on time 2 If 9 00 PM comes but the host is unavailable at the moment the backup task will start on the next workday if the location s host is available 3 If the location s host will never be available on workdays at 9 00 PM the task never starts 4 4 6 3 Fits time interval Applies to Windows Linux Restricts a backup task s start time to a specified interval Example A company uses different locations on the same network attached storage for backing up users data and servers The workday starts at 8AM and ends at 5 PM Users data should be backed up as soon as the users log off but not
99. Please refer to Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution p 167 for details 8 1 1 Linux based bootable media When using the media builder you have to specify 1 optional The parameters of the Linux kernel Separate multiple parameters with spaces For example to be able to select a display mode for the bootable agent each time the media starts type vga ask For a list of parameters see Kernel parameters p 162 2 The Acronis bootable components to be placed on the media Universal Restore will be enabled if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Universal Restore is installed on the machine where the media is created 3 optional The timeout interval for the boot menu plus the component that will automatically start on timeout If not configured the Acronis loader waits for someone to select whether to boot the operating system if present or the Acronis component If you set say 10 sec for the bootable agent the agent will launch 10 seconds after the menu is displayed This enables unattended onsite operation when booting from a PXE server or WDS RIS 4 optional Remote logon settings user name and password to be entered on the console side at connection to the agent If you leave these fields empty the connection will be enabled on typing any symbols in the prompt window 5 optional Network settings p 163 TCP IP settings to be assigned to the machine network adapters 6 o
100. Siere terer eneren eere eels Been hein hein Seeds Needs Nevin evi ee 172 9 3 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite cccccccccccccsssseeeeceeeeecaaeeseeeeeeeeesaaaaseeeceeeeessaaaeeeeeeess 173 9 4 Choosing the operating system for disk management cecscecccccecseeeeseeeceeeeesaaaeeeeeeeees 173 9 5 Disk ManaGeMeNnt VIEW ccccccccccccessesseeeccceeesaseeeseeeeeeeeesssesseeeeeeeeesseeaasseeeeeeeesaaaasseeeess 173 9 6 DISK OPCFAtiONS 5 5ese5esehcredevesesssenaneenaeeepesetenatnneassepedecenninnedseessdeeenauctberberedtsensanbesedes lt 0s 174 9 6 1 Disk initialization isx menneiden Meher dete dapedaenl sess setae S AA TN AAT 174 9627 Basic disk cloninig t iedevisieectdce hei eh eid ene Shain di ead Dlaatiee 175 9 6 3 Disk conversion MBR to GPT iss reia a sedans divers a aaa aaia aiiiar 177 9 6 4 Disk conversion GPT tOMBR vissini A Aaa a aa ai eii 178 9 6 5 Disk conversion basic to AYNAMIC ccccsccesccsscescessccsscesecsseesecesscesecsesesscssecseeesecsecsesesecssecseseseeeaseness 178 9 6 6 Disk conversion dynamic to DASIC ccccsccessesscessessccsscesscsseesseesecesecsecesecssecsesesscsecsesesecesecseseaeceaeeness 179 96 7 Changing disk Status wicsissccsivcessissescesvessuscessasacsdacedecaancsdacsdecuancedacedeceancudassduceancudaseducdadudadsducedadudadtdcaatdes 180 9 7 Vol m operatios norena ea cise ck Sens te eye oc tee ees So pa ena we ea na Se a aa TA 180 9 7 1 Creating a VOLUN Cvvscsc
101. Status status p 191 of the backup plan Machine name of the machine on which the backup plan exists only for centralized backup plans Schedule whether the task is scheduled or set to start manually Last start time how much time has passed since the last plan or task start Deployment state the deployment states of the backup plan only for centralized backup plans Last finish time how much time has passed since the last plan or task end Last result the result of the last plan or task run Type backup plan or task type Owner the name of the user who created or last modified the plan Next start time when the plan or task will start the next time Comments description of the plan if provided Tasks The Tasks tab displays a list of all tasks of the selected backup plan To view the selected task details click Details Progress The Progress tab lists all the selected backup plan s activities that are currently running or waiting for their turn to run History The History tab lets you examine the history of all the backup plan s accomplished activities What to back up The Source tab provides the following information on the data selected for backup Source type the type of data selected for backing up Items to back up items selected to back up and their size Where to back up The Destination tab provides the following information Name name of the archive
102. T TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Third party code may be provided with the Software and or Service The license terms for such third parties are detailed in the license txt file located in the root installation directory You can always find the latest up to date list of the third party code and the associated license terms used with the Software and or Service at http kb acronis com content 7696 Table of contents 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 ccccccsscsssssccccscscsscscccsccsssecsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesss 8 1 1 What s new in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 0 0 ecccccccseeseeeccceeecseeeeseeeceeeeesseeaaeeeeeeeeesseaaeess 8 1 2 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 COMPONENMS cccccccssssesseececeeeccaeeesseeceeeeessaaeeseeeeeeeessaaeaess 9 T 21 Agent for WINdOWS seser a cas asses eS 9 1 2 2 Management Console E E EE EAA E AE N A E AS A E E 10 1 2 3 Bootable Media Build eisie dcsscscdsecsscsdesecvessaasaduedsacadasaaaeaiacdiasaduedsacaiasdsacaiasdiasaduediasdiadecdeseatecbeaesescdeneze 10 1 3 Supported file Syste See rnr OA E a Or EEr E EEEE A sess secant 10 1 4 Technical Support cccccccccccccssesssseeceeeecsaeeeseeeceeeseesaaeeseeeceeesessuaausueceeeeessauaaseeeeeesesssaaagess 11 E E a E E A cececccacecacccacccacdcacccecccaccsaccvaccsascvaccsacccscccacdvadecacdcacecacdeacesacdsacedadess 12 2 1 Using the management console cccccssssssseeccceccce
103. TP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 7 3 4 Volume selection Select the volumes to mount and configure the mounting parameters for each of the selected volumes as follows 1 Select the check box for each volume you need to mount 2 Click on the selected volume to set its mounting parameters Access mode choose the mode you want the volume to be mounted in Read only enables exploring and opening files within the backup without committing any changes Read write with this mode the program assumes that the backup content will be modified and creates an incremental backup to capture the changes Assign letter in Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will assign an unused letter to the mounted volume If required select another letter to assign from the drop down list Mount point in Linux specify the directory where you want the volume to be mounted 3 If several volumes are selected for mounting click on every volume to set its mounting parameters described in the previous step 4 Click OK 7 3 5 Managing mounted images Once a volume is mounted you can browse files and folders contained in the backup using a file manager and copy the desired files to any destination Thus if you need to take out only a few files and folders from a volume backup you do not have to perform
104. The NT signature is a record that is kept in the MBR It uniquely identifies the disk for the operating system When recovering a disk containing a system volume you can choose what to do with the NT signature of the target disk Specify any of the following parameters Select automatically The software will keep the NT signature of the target disk if it is the same as the NT signature stored in the backup In other words if you recover the disk to the same disk that was backed up Otherwise the software will generate a new NT signature for the target disk This is the default selection recommended in most cases Use the following settings only if you absolutely need to Create new Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will generate a new NT signature for the target hard disk Recover from backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will replace the NT signature of the target hard disk with one from the disk backup Note You should be absolutely sure that none of the existing disks on this machine has the same NT signature Otherwise the operating system runs from the first disk at the startup discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable Recoveri
105. Tower of Hanoi scheme Each backup is retained based on its level p 41 and then deleted You specify the number of levels in Number of levels The retention rules are applied after creating a backup They are applied sequentially in the primary the second and all next locations Custom scheme Each backup is retained until the rules you specify are met Then it is either deleted or moved To set up deleting the backups In Clean up archive select Using retention rules In the Retention Rules window p 69 specify the rules and select If the specified conditions are met Delete the oldest backups In Apply retention rules specify when to apply the rules To set up moving the backups In Clean up archive select Using retention rules In the Retention Rules window p 69 specify the rules and select If the specified conditions are met Move the oldest backups to another location Click OK and then specify the location under Where to replicate move backups In Apply retention rules specify when to apply the rules You can choose to apply the retention rules before creating a backup after creating a backup ona schedule or combine these options For the second and next locations creating a backup means copying or moving a backup there from the previous location 4 5 4 Retention rules for the Custom scheme In the Retention Rules window you can select how long to store backups in the location and whether to move o
106. Use filters to display the desired activities and log entries in the table You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones For details see Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 16 Select the activity or log entry to take an action on log entries For details see Actions on log entries p 199 and Log entry details p 200 10 2 1 Actions on log entries All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the log toolbar These operations can also be performed with the context menu by right clicking the log entry or the activity The following is a guideline for you to perform actions on log entries Select a single activity Select Activities in the Display drop down list and click an activity The Information pane will show log entries for the selected activity Select a single log entry Click on it Select multiple log non contiguous hold down CTRL and click the log entries one by one entries contiguous select a single log entry then hold down SHIFT and click another log entry All the log entries between the first and last selections will be selected too View a log entry s details 1 Select a log entry Do one of the following Double click the selection m Click Q Details The log entry s details will be displayed See Log entry details for details of the log entry s operations Save the selected log 1 Display Activities and s
107. a displays different views and action pages according the items you select in the menu or Navigation tree 2 1 21 Views A view appears on the main area when clicking any item in the Navigation tree in the Navigation pane p 14 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Connected to This Machine Local Connection as Administrator MACHINE14 p 8 x E je comet Actions 8 Tools Navigation Optons a l Hep 4 acronis Navigation K Log Show short ist Show all Browse the log of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 operations 4 Machinei4 ru corp acronis c 4B vauts Display Activites ths For custom period From 3 13 2011 To 3 16 2011 PS centralized Q dex log BD Personal TEA ctivity Startdate amp End date Duration Result Aerts all BB Tape management Backing up disk 3 15 20 07PM 3 15 2011 7 32 22PM 27 minutes 15se Succeeded Disk management Generating Disaster Recovery 3 15 2 2 20PM second Succeeded Backup plans and tasks Prepare Validation PM 17 minutes 45 se Succeeded Validating backup archive 50 12PM 17 minutes 19 se Succeeded Shortcuts Local machine Machine 14 ru corp d Logs Details What to backup Where to back up Type Date and tme Message 3 15 01 M TOL An activity of The Backup command backs up data to the speofied destina 315 201 Command engine Translating command message with command ID F y of The Backup command backs up date to the spec
108. a new xml file appears in the dedicated folder the agent imports the backup plan from that file If you change or delete an xml file in the dedicated folder the agent automatically changes or deletes the appropriate backup plan Editing the export file A backup plan imported in such way cannot be edited through the graphical user interface You can edit the export file p 194 with a text editor either before or after the deployment If you edit the file before the deployment the changes will take effect on all the machines where the plan will be deployed You may want to change the direct specification of the item to backup such as C or C Users with a template such as SYSTEM or AIl Profiles Folder For more information about templates see Selection rules for volumes and Selection rules for files and folders You may also want to change credentials used by the plan To deploy a backup plan as file 1 Create a backup plan on one of the machines 2 Export it to an xml file p 193 3 Optional Edit the export file See Editing the export file p 194 for more information 4 Deploy this xml file to the dedicated folder The dedicated folder path In Windows The default path to the dedicated folder is ALLUSERSPROFILE Acronis BackupAndRecovery import The path is stored in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis MMS Configuration Import folderPath The absence of the key means that the agent does not
109. ace will be available for use To overcome the limitation 1 Turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery As a result the recovered OS will be converted to use UEFI for booting The target disk will be initialized as a source one MBR Limitation only 2 TB of the disk space will be available for use Platform UEFI Target disk lt 2 TB The target disk will be initialized as GPT The recovered disk OS will be automatically converted to support UEFI booting Note If you want to recover the source disk as is 1 Turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS Boot from a bootable media and perform the recovery The target disk will be initialized as the source one MBR Additional steps Turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS after recovery Possible issue If target machine does not support BIOS the system will not boot after recovery Platform UEFI Target disk gt 2 TB The target disk will be initialized as GPT The recovered disk OS will be automatically converted to support UEFI booting The target disk will be initialized as the source one MBR Limitation only 2 TB of the disk space will be available for use Additional steps Turn off the UEFI mode in BIOS after recovery Possible issue If target machine does not support BIOS the system will not boot after recovery Original ERN Platform BIOS
110. ackup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive Validation of an archive will validate all the archive s backups A vault or a location validation will validate all archives stored in this vault location While successful validation means high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery ina bootable environment to a spare hard drive can guarantee success of the recovery At least ensure that the backup can be successfully validated using the bootable media Different ways to create a validation task Using the Validation page is the most general way to create a validation task Here you can validate immediately or set up a validation schedule for any backup archive or vault you have permission to access Validation of an archive or of the latest backup in the archive can be scheduled as part of the backup plan For more information see Creating a backup plan p 29 To access the Validation page first select a validation object a vault an archive or a backup To select a vault click the Vaults icon in the Navigation pane and select the vault by expanding the vaults tree in the Vaults view or directly in the Navigation pane To select an archive select a vault and then in the Vault view select the Archive view tab and click the archive name To sele
111. ackup is performed by taking a snapshot The File level backup snapshot p 85 option determines whether a snapshot will be taken during file level backup The option determines whether to take snapshots of multiple volumes at the same time or one by one The preset is Enable When this option is set to Enable snapshots of all volumes being backed up will be created simultaneously Use this option to create a time consistent backup of data spanned across multiple volumes for instance for an Oracle database When this option is set to Disable the volumes snapshots will be taken one after the other As a result if the data spans across several volumes the resulting backup may be not consistent 4 7 16 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the ability of notifying users about backup completion through e mail or the messaging service 4 7 16 1 E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 Under Send e mail notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully
112. ackup stream or the backup archive compression level If you do nothing in this section the default values p 75 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Reset to default Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears Therefore in this section you always see only the settings that differ from the default values To reset all the settings to the default values click Reset to default Plan s credentials comments label To access these settings click Show plan s credentials comments label Plan s credentials p 46 Optional The backup plan will run on behalf of the user who is creating the plan You can change the plan s credentials if necessary Comments Optional Type a description of the backup plan Label p 47 Optional Type a text label for the machine you are going to back up The label can be used to identify the machine in various scenarios After you have performed all the required steps click OK to create the backup plan After that you might be prompted for the password p 48 The plan you have created will be accessible for examination and managing in the Backup plans and tasks p 188 view 4 2 1 Selecting data to back up To select the data to back up 1
113. act zone size in the Acronis Secure Zone Size p 140 window 3 Click OK 6 2 1 2 Acronis Secure Zone Size Enter the Acronis Secure Zone size or drag the slider to select any size between the minimum and the maximum ones The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space on all the volumes you have selected in the previous step If you have to take space from the boot or the system volume please bear the following in mind Moving or resizing of the volume from which the system is currently booted will require a reboot Taking all free space from a system volume may cause the operating system to work unstably and even fail to start Do not set the maximum zone size if the boot or the system volume is selected 6 2 1 3 Password for Acronis Secure Zone Setting up a password protects the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access The program will ask for the password at any operation relating to the zone and the archives located there such as data backup and recovery validating archives resizing and deleting the zone To set up a password 1 Choose Use password 2 Inthe Enter the password field type a new password 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Click OK To disable password 1 Choose Do not use 2 Click OK 6 2 1 4 Result confirmation The Result confirmation windo
114. after an error occurs You can send this information to Acronis technical support The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the The Feedback Confirmation dialog check box Notify if bootable media is not created This option defines whether to display a pop up window when the management console is launched on a machine and no bootable media has been created on that machine The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Notify if bootable media is not created check box Notify when the management console is connected to a component of a different version This option defines whether to display a pop up window when a console is connected to an agent management server and their versions differ The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Notify when the management console is connected to a component of a different version check box About the task execution results This option is effective only when the console is connected to a managed machine The option defines whether to display the pop up messages about task run results successful completion failure or success with warnings When the displaying of pop up messages is disabled you can review the task execution states and results in the Backup plans and tasks view The preset is Enabled for all results To make a setting for each result successful completion failure or success with warnings individually select
115. ails This behavior can be suppressed by adding the Date variable p 52 to the archive name If you do not select the Name backup files using the archive name check box Each backup will have a unique file name with the exact time stamp and the backup type For example MyData_2010_03_26_17_01_38_960D tib This standard file naming allows for a wider range of backup destinations and backup schemes Restrictions When using simplified file naming the following functionality is not available Setting up full incremental and differential backups within a single backup plan You need to create separate backup plans for each type of backup Backup to a managed vault tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage Setting up retention rules Setting up regular conversion of backups to a virtual machine Tip The FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems do not allow the following characters in the file name backslash slash colon asterisk question mark quotation mark less than sign lt greater than sign gt and pipe 4 3 1 Usage examples This section provides examples of how you can use simplified file naming 4 3 1 1 Example 1 Daily backup replacing the old one Consider the following scenario You want to perform a daily full backup of your machine You want to store the backup locally in the file MyMachine tib You want each new backup to replace the old one
116. al backup stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive to recover data from an incremental backup An incremental backup is most useful when you need the possibility to roll back to any one of multiple saved states the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size It is widely accepted that incremental backups are less reliable than full ones because if one backup in the chain is corrupted the next ones can no longer be used However storing multiple full backups is not an option when you need multiple prior versions of your data because reliability of an oversized archive is even more questionable Example Backing up a database transaction log Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup A differential backup is most useful when you are interested in saving only the most recent data state the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size The typical conclusion is differential backups take longer to do and are faster to restore while incremental ones are quicker to do and take longer to restore In fact there is no physical difference between an incremental backup appended to a full backup and a differential backup appended to the same full backup at the same poin
117. ame enter the user name Password enter the password d Click OK 10 Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct 5 7 6 2 Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 Inthe Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When recovery completes successfully to send notification when the recovery task has completed successfully When recovery fails to send notification when the recovery task has failed When user interaction is required check box to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required 4 Click
118. ample setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of months Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Last day of every month schedule Run the task once at 10 PM on the last day of every month The schedule s parameters are set up as follows Months lt All months gt 2 Days Last The task will run on the last day of every month despite its actual date 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From empty To empty This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Last day of every month schedule is added to the full backups while the differential backups are scheduled to be performed once a week and incremental on workda
119. an be done later using the standard Acronis Disk Director Lite disk tools 9 6 2 Basic disk cloning Sometimes it is necessary to transfer all the disk data onto a new disk It can be a case of expanding the system volume starting a new system layout or disk evacuation due to a hardware fault In any case the reason for the Clone basic disk operation can be summed up as the necessity to transfer all the source disk data to a target disk exactly as it is Acronis Disk Director Lite allows the operation to be carried out to basic MBR disks only To plan the Clone basic disk operation 1 Select a disk you want to clone 2 Select a disk as target for the cloning operation 3 Select a cloning method and specify advanced options The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately It is advisable that you deactivate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 227 ASRM if it is active before cloning a system disk Otherwise the cloned operating system might not boot You can activate the ASRM again after the cloning is completed If deactivation is not possible choose the As is method to clone the disk 9 6 2 1 Selecting source and target disks The program displays a list of partitioned disks and asks the user to select the source disk from which data will be transferred to another disk The next step is selection of a disk as target for the cloning operation The program enables the
120. and so on When the bootable agent starts on that machine it will find no NICs with known MAC addresses and will configure the NICs in the same order as you did Example The bootable agent could use one of the network adapters for communication with the management console through the production network Automatic configuration could be done for this connection Sizeable data for recovery could be transferred through the second NIC included in the dedicated backup network by means of static TCP IP settings 8 1 1 3 Network port While creating bootable media you have an option to pre configure the network port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The choice is available between the default port the currently used port the new port enter the port number If the port has not been pre configured the agent uses the default port number 9876 This port is also used as default by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console 8 1 1 4 Drivers for Universal Restore While creating bootable media you have an option to add Windows drivers to the media The drivers will be used by Universal Restore when recovering Windows on a machine with a dissimilar processor different motherboard or different mass storage device than in the backed up system You will be able to configure the Universal Restore to search the media for the drivers that best fit the target hardware to get the mass storage d
121. art PE and you configure the network connection select Go gt System gt Storage gt Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 to start 8 2 Connecting to a machine booted from media Once a machine boots from bootable media the machine terminal displays a startup window with the IP address es obtained from DHCP or set according to the pre configured values Remote connection To connect to the machine remotely select Connect gt Manage a remote machine in the console menu and specify one of the machine s IP addresses Provide the user name and password if these have been configured when creating the bootable media Local connection Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console is always present on the bootable media Anyone who has physical access to the machine terminal can run the console and connect Just click Run management console in the bootable agent startup window 8 3 Working under bootable media Operations on a machine booted with bootable media are very similar to backup and recovery under the operating system The difference is as follows 1 Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive under the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1
122. artner you receive a confirmation e mail with a registration code Click Enter new registration code on the same web page and register the license The license becomes available on the Initial Seeding Recovery tab A license purchased in Acronis online store becomes available immediately after the payment is processed 11 1 7 8 How do I track a Large Scale Recovery order status On the Acronis Web site the Initial Seeding Recovery tab shows you the status of all your orders In addition you will receive e mail notifications about most important events Available The license can be used for any machine An order was created This status is set upon completion of the Large Scale Recovery order form This means that the license cannot be used for any other machine From this point on you can cancel the order if something goes wrong This will return the license to the pool of available licenses The order is being processed Order processing in the datacenter started Writing data Your backups are being written onto the media From this point on you cannot cancel the order Writing data has been completed Your backups have been successfully written to the media Ready to ship the media Your order has been processed and the media will be shipped shortly The order has been completed The media has been shipped The media has been shipped to you the carrier and the tracking number are specified
123. as follows If there has been a full backup since the last conversion the virtual machine is re created from scratch This involves creating a temporary virtual machine as described earlier in this section Otherwise the existing virtual machine is updated to reflect changes since the last conversion If updating is not possible for example if you deleted the intermediate snapshots see below the virtual machine is re created from scratch Intermediate snapshots To be able to update the virtual machine the software stores a few intermediate snapshots of it They are named Backup and Replica and should be kept Unneeded snapshots are deleted automatically The latest Replica snapshot corresponds to the result of the latest conversion You can go to this snapshot if you want to return the machine to that state for example if you worked with the machine and now want to discard the changes made to it Other snapshots are for internal use by the software 4 7 Default backup options Each Acronis agent has its own default backup options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a backup plan you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this plan only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The n
124. ased on Microsoft Virtual PC and inherits its limitations up to 3 IDE disks and 1 processor SCSI disks are not supported Processors Initial setting if not contained in the backup or if the backed up setting is not supported by the virtualization server it is the default server s setting This is the number of processors of the new virtual machine In most cases it is set to one The result of assignment of more than one processor to the machine is not guaranteed The number of virtual processors may be limited by the host CPU configuration the virtualization product and the guest operating system Multiple virtual processors are generally available on multi processor hosts A multicore host CPU or hyperthreading may enable multiple virtual processors on a single processor host 5 6 Bootability troubleshooting If a system was bootable at the time of backup you expect that it will boot after recovery However the information the operating system stores and uses for booting up may become outdated during recovery especially if you change volume sizes locations or destination drives Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery Other loaders might also be fixed but there are cases when you have to re activate the loaders Specifically when you recover Linux volumes it is sometimes necessary to apply fixes or make booting changes so that Linux can boot and load correctly Below is asummary of t
125. asked to provide it 3 Perform operations by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can also be accessed from the Archive name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with archives stored in a vault To Do Validate an archive Click P validate The Validation p 143 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source Validation of an archive will check all the archive s backups Export an archive Click amp 2 Export The Export p 146 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source The export of an archive creates a duplicate of the archive with all its backups in the location you specify Delete a single archive 1 Select one or more archives you want to delete or multiple archives 2 Click X Delete Delete all archives in the vault The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 157 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and make corrections if need be select the check boxes for the desired archives then confirm the deletion Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click He Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the new window that has check boxes for each archi
126. ason the video mode is detected incorrectly do the following 1 Inthe boot menu press F11 2 Add to the command prompt the following command vga ask and then proceed with booting 3 From the list of supported video modes choose the appropriate one by typing its number for example 318 and then press ENTER If you do not wish to follow this procedure every time you boot from media on a given hardware configuration re create the bootable media with the appropriate mode number in our example vga 0x318 typed in the Kernel parameters window see the Bootable Media Builder p 161 section for details 8 3 2 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices This section describes how to configure Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI devices and Network Direct Attached Storage NDAS devices when working under bootable media These devices are connected to the machine through a network interface and appear as if they were locally attached devices On the network an iSCSI device is identified by its IP address and an NDAS device is identified by its device ID An iSCSI device is sometimes called an iSCSI target A hardware or software component that provides interaction between the machine and the iSCSI target is called the iSCSI initiator The name of the iSCSI initiator is usually defined by an administrator of the server that hosts the device To add an iSCSI device 1 Ina bootable media Linux based or PE based run the managem
127. ated space is left on the disk you also will be able to choose the position of the new volume on the disk If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select destination disks p 182 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume options p 183 Set the volume options On the next wizard page you can assign the volume Letter by default the first free letter of the alphabet and optionally a Label by default none Here you will also specify the File system and the Cluster size The wizard will prompt you to choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 TB NTFS or to leave the volume Unformatted In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system If you are creating a basic volume which can be made into a system volume this page will be different giving you the opportunity to select the volume Type Primary Active Primary or Logical Typically Primary is selected to install an operating system to a volume Select the Active default value if you want to install an operating system on this volume to boot at machine startup If the Primary button is not selected the Active option w
128. ation What to validate select either to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Validation of the archive will validate all the archive s backups and may take a long time and a lot of system resources Validation schedule appears only if you have selected the on schedule in step 1 set the schedule of validation For more information see the Scheduling p 53 section 4 2 8 Backup plan s credentials Provide the credentials for the account under which the plan s tasks will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The tasks will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If any of the tasks has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the plan creation Use the following credentials The tasks will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about operations available depending on the user privilege
129. ault recovery options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a recovery task you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this task only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all recovery tasks you will create later on this machine To view and change the default recovery options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default recovery options from the top menu Availability of the recovery options The set of available recovery options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media The type of data being recovered disk file The operating system being recovered from the disk backup The following table summarizes the availability of the recovery options Additional settings p 128 Validate backup archive before recovery Use FTP in Active mode Restart the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Restart the machine automatically after recovery is finished Check file system after recovery Change SID after recovery Set current date and time for recovered files Error handling p 129 Do not show messages and dialogs wh
130. available backup schemes Simple to schedule when and how often to backup data and specify retention rules Run now to perform the backup immediately right after you click the OK button Grandfather Father Son to use the Grandfather Father Son backup scheme The scheme does not allow data to be backed up more than once a day You set the days of week when the daily backup will be performed and select from these days the day of weekly monthly backup Then you set the retention periods for the daily referred to as sons weekly referred to as fathers and monthly referred to as grandfathers backups The expired backups will be deleted automatically Tower of Hanoi to use the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme This scheme allows you to schedule when and how often to back up sessions and select the number of backup levels up to 16 The data can be backed up more than once a day By setting up the backup schedule and selecting backup levels you automatically obtain the rollback period the guaranteed number of sessions that you can go back at any time The automatic cleanup mechanism maintains the required rollback period by deleting the expired backups and keeping the most recent backups of each level Custom to create a custom scheme where you are free to set up a backup strategy in the way your enterprise needs it most specify multiple schedules for different backup types add conditions and specify the retention
131. ave time and network traffic during the initial full backup It is useful when backing up very large volumes of data or entire machines to the online storage 11 1 6 3 Is Initial Seeding a paid service Yes you need to buy one Initial Seeding license per machine 11 1 6 4 What types of hard drive can I use for Initial Seeding Acronis accepts hard disk drives of the following interface types IDE ATA SATA USB connected drives SCSI drives are not accepted You can back up directly to the device or back up to a local or network folder and then copy the backup to the device Make sure that the device has only one volume and that the file system on that volume is NTFS or FAT32 11 1 6 5 Can I send more than one backup under a single Initial Seeding license No An Initial Seeding license allows you to create only one backup on the machine However if you have made a mistake or have decided to create another backup for any reason you can cancel the initial seeding order As a result the license will become available again 11 1 6 6 Can I send backups taken from a number of machines on a single hard drive Yes However the number of required licenses is still one per machine 11 1 6 7 How to buy an Initial Seeding license You can buy an Initial Seeding license from an Acronis partner or in Acronis online store Follow the link www acronis com my backup recovery online buy to locate a partner or to buy online Having purchase
132. backing up the machine If you do not renew the subscription you will be able to back up data to the online storage for five days following the expiration date You will be able to recover data from the online storage for 30 days following the expiration date 11 1 8 5 How do I renew a subscription Buy another subscription and specify it as the next subscription of the same machine The new subscription will be activated as soon as the current subscription expires An expired subscription can be renewed within five days after expiration In such cases the new subscription will be activated immediately Renewing a single subscription To renew a subscription 1 Goto the account management Web page 2 Make sure that you have an available subscription with the same storage quota 3 Select the machine that you want to renew the subscription for and then click Renew The subscription appears in the Next subscription column for the selected machine Renewing a number of activated subscriptions at once This operation is possible if the appropriate number of new subscriptions are identical to the currently used subscriptions Make sure the new subscriptions are available on your account management Web page Then click Renew all The confirmation window will summarize which subscriptions will be renewed If identical subscriptions are not found for some of the machines you have the option to cancel automatic renewal and renew each subsc
133. backup content Recovery to disk group unallocated space When recovering a dynamic volume to disk group unallocated space the software preserves the volume s original type and size If the disk group configuration does not allow for the original volume type the volume will be recovered as a simple or spanned volume If this volume does not fit the unallocated space the volume will be resized by decreasing its free space Examples of when the disk group configuration does not allow the original type of the volume Example 1 The group contains fewer disks than is required for the dynamic volume Assume you are going to recover an 80 GB RAID 5 volume that had resided on three disks to a disk group consisting of two disks The total size of unallocated space is 100 GB 40 GB on the first disk and 60 GB on the second The RAID 5 volume will be recovered as a spanned volume across two disks Example 2 Unallocated space distribution does not allow recovery of certain types of dynamic volumes Assume you are going to recover a 30 GB striped volume to a disk group consisting of two disks The total size of unallocated space is 50 GB 10 GB on the first disk and 40 GB on the second The striped volume will be recovered to the second disk as simple Recovery to a disk that has not been initialized In this case the target disk will be automatically initialized to the MBR partitioning style The dynamic volumes will be recovered as basic ones If the
134. bout to install updates Having downloaded one or more updates and scheduled their installation the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system records an event with the event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient and event number 18 into the System log the type of this event is Information When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area Log name System Event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient Event type Information Event ID 18 Tip To set up a similar backup plan for machines running Microsoft Windows XP replace the text in Event source with Windows Update Agent and leave the remaining fields the same How to view events in Event viewer To open a log in Event Viewer 1 On the Desktop or in the Start menu right click My Computer and then click Manage 2 Inthe Computer Management console expand System Tools and then expand Event Viewer 3 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group To view properties of an event including the event source and event number 1 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group 2 Inthe list of events in the right pane double clic
135. ccccccsscssscsseesscssecsecesscssecsesesecssecsesesscssecsesesscssessesessenseenes 62 BAIS CONGITIONS cesta ccs a Meas euch N ig auaa E E E 63 4 5 Replication and retention Of backups errnit arrra arr E 66 4 51 Supported locat ON aa araa pose dels sais e aa Eaa Pa LETA Sa KOPA sacked rata teks vara aeadin eaneieieesee pases 67 4 5 2 Setting Up replication Of backups cscsscsscsscescsscescsssesceseeseeseesecseeseeseeseesecsecsecaecsecseesecseeseesesaecaesaesaesas 68 4 5 3 Setting up retention Of backups cceeeseeeescescsscsssessessessesessesseeseeseeaeesessecsecsecsecsessecsecseeseeseeaesaesaesaesas 68 4 5 4 Retention rules for the Custom SCHEME ceeessesesseseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeaesecaesecaeecseeeeseeaeseeaeeeeaeeetaeeetseeatees 69 4 5 5 Replication cleanup inactivity time c cccceessecessescsssscescseeecssesessssesecseeesseeessscecsesscsessseesseeesseseseesasens 70 A5 6 Usage examples wi nnck thin E Aaa A en i aie Eee oe O 71 4 6 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual MACHING cccecsseccececcseeeseeeeeeeeeseseaeseeeeeeeeeeaas 72 4 6 1 Setting up a conversion schedule ccescecescsscescescessesseseesesseeseesecsecseeseesecsecaecseesecseesecseeaeesecaeeaesaesaesas 73 4 6 2 Selecting a machine that will perform conversion cccsccsseseeseeseeseeseesessesseeseesecsesseeseeseesecaesaesaesaesaesas 73 4 6 3 How regular conversion to VM WOKS ccscsscssssseeseeseescsssess
136. ce and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Should the disk experience a physical failure the zone and the archives located there will be lost That s why Acronis Secure Zone should not be the only location where a backup is stored In enterprise environments Acronis Secure Zone can be thought of as an intermediate location used for backup when an ordinary location is temporarily unavailable or connected through a slow or busy channel Advantages Acronis Secure Zone Enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides Offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error Since it is internal archive storage it eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users Can serve as a primary destination when using replication of backups p 68 Limitations The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk 6 2 1 Creating Acronis Secure Zone You can create Acronis Secure Zone while the operating system is running or using bootable media To create Acronis Secure Zone perform the following steps Location and size Disk p 140 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volume s free space Size
137. ceceececceseceeseueeeeceeueeeeeeceeueneeseeeeseneesauss 160 8 1 1 Linux based bootable media cccccccsccsccsssccsssccsssecssscsesscsesccsusccssscsessccussceuseceesceussueusscuscesaseasaseasees 161 8 1 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x cccscsccsseseeseeseesecsecsecseesecsecsecsecseesecsecsecsecsessesaeeseeseeaeeaeeaee 165 8 1 3 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x OF 3 0 csccsccsssscesseseeseeseeseeseeseeseesecsecseesecaeesessesaesaesaesaesaesaees 166 8 1 4 Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution ccccscseeseeseesecsessessessesseseeenees 167 8 2 Connecting to a machine booted from Media cccccccccsssssssescceeceeaaeeeseeeceeeeesaaaaseeeeeees 167 8 3 Working under bootable Media ccccecscccccccccseeeseeeccceceesaaeesseeeceeeeeseaaeseeeeeeseesaaaaseeeeess 168 8 3 1 lt Setting up adis play Mod n eea h N hietien hates aves fon fev esate besa Sorters teas Sat NRE eeiees 168 8 3 2 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS deVICES ccccscsceseeseeseeseeseeseeseesecseesecsecsecsecseeseesecsecsecaessesseesecseeaeeaesaees 169 8 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media ccccccceeees 169 8 5 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager cccccssesccccsseececaeesccccseuseecaeeeeesseseeesueesessseeseeesaaages 171 9 Disk managementixiis sesisises aise AA 172 9 1 S pported file syste 0 eee ee Enae tanir aaA 172 9 2 Ba sicprecauti N
138. cepted alerts table 10 4 Collecting system information The system information collection tool gathers information about the machine to which the management console is connected and saves it to a file You may want to provide this file when contacting Acronis technical support This option is available under bootable media and for machines where Agent for Windows Agent for Linux or Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server is installed To collect system information 1 Inthe management console select from the top menu Help gt Collect system information from machine name 2 Specify where to save the file with system information 10 5 Adjusting machine options The machine options define the general behavior of all Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 agents operating on the managed machine and so the options are considered machine specific To access the machine options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Machine options from the top menu 10 5 1 Customer Experience Program This option defines whether the machine will participate in the Acronis Customer Experience Program ACEP If you choose Yes I want to participate in the ACEP information about the hardware configuration the most and least used features and about any problems will be automatically collected from the machine and sent to Acronis on a regular basis The end results are intended to provide software improvements
139. ch disk in the volume it means that to create a striped volume a user will need two or more dynamic disks The disks in a striped volume don t have to be identical but there must be unused space available on each disk that you want to include in the volume and the size of the volume will depend on the size of the smallest space Access to the data on a striped volume is usually faster than access to the same data on a single physical disk because the I O is spread across more than one disk Striped volumes are created for improved performance not for their better reliability they do not contain redundant information Mirrored Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 whose data is duplicated on two identical physical disks All of the data on one disk is copied to another disk to provide data redundancy Almost any volume can be mirrored including the system and boot volumes and if one of the disks fails the data can still be accessed from the remaining disks Unfortunately the hardware limitations on size and performance are even more severe with the use of mirrored volumes Mirrored Striped Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 0 combining the advantage of the high I O speed of the striped layout and redundancy of the mirror type The evident disadvantage remains inherent with the mirror architecture a low disk to volume size ratio RAID 5 A fault tolerant volume whose data is stripe
140. cond one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable You have the following two alternatives to retain system bootability on the target disk volume 1 Copy NT signature to provide the target disk with the source disk NT signature matched with the Registry keys also copied on the target disk 2 Leave NT signature to keep the old target disk signature and update the operating system according to the signature If you need to copy the NT signature 1 Select the Copy NT signature check box You receive the warning If there is an operating system on the hard disk uninstall either the source or the target hard disk drive from your machine prior to starting the machine again Otherwise the OS will start from the first of the two and the OS on the second disk will become unbootable The Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box is selected and disabled automatically Click Finish to add the pending operation Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window Wait until the operation is finished Wait until the machine is turned off OY oO oe BN Disconnect either the source or the target hard disk drive from the machine 7 Start up
141. convert a dynamic disk to basic 1 Select the dynamic disk to convert to basic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to basic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the dynamic disk being converted to basic You will be advised about the changes that will happen to the system if the chosen disk is converted from dynamic into basic E g if such a conversion will stop the disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or if the disk you want to convert to basic contains any volumes of the types that are only supported by dynamic disks all volume types except Simple volumes then you will be warned here about the possible damage to the data involved in the conversion Please note the operation is unavailable for a dynamic disk containing Spanned Striped or RAID 5 volumes 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately After the conversion the last 8Mb of disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic In some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of disk space are reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating syste
142. covery task has failed When user interaction is required to send to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required 3 Inthe E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons In the Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default value In the SMTP server field enter the name of the SMTP server In the Port field set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 In the User name field enter the user name In the Password field enter the password 1O OO Oy UL e Click Additional e mail parameters to configure the additional e mail parameters as follows a From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address b Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection c Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User n
143. covery without access to the storage node in case of networking problems or failure of the storage node Recovery of the storage node itself Export from an HDD based vault to a tape device can be considered as simple on demand archive staging The resulting archive s name By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name Exporting part of an archive to the same location Exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists Exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation The resulting archive s options The exported archive inherits the options of the original archive including encryption and the password When exporting a password protected archive you are prompted for the password If the original archive is encrypted the password is used to encrypt the resulting archive Source and destination locations When the console is connected to a managed machine you can export an archive or part of an archive to and from any location accessible to
144. ct a backup select an archive in the Archive view expand the archive by clicking the expand button to the left of the archive name and then click the backup After selecting the validation object select Validate from the context menu The Validation page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select when to validate and optionally provide a name for the task To create a validation task perform the following steps What to validate Validate Choose an object to validate Archive p 149 in this case you need to specify the archive Backup p 144 specify the archive first Then select the desired backup in this archive Vault p 144 select a vault or other location to validate archives from Credentials p 145 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it When to validate Start validation p 145 Specify when and how often to perform validation Task parameters Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the validation task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task s credentials p 146 Optional The validation task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary Comments Optional Enter comments on the task After you configure all the required settings click OK to create the validation
145. d Restart machine automatically after recovery is finished This option is effective when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled This option enables booting the machine into the recovered operating system without user interaction Check file system after recovery This option is effective only when recovering disks or volumes When operating under bootable media this option is not effective for the NTFS file system The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to check the integrity of the file system after a disk or volume recovery Set current date and time for recovered files This option is effective only when recovering files The preset is Enabled This option defines whether to recover the files date and time from the archive or assign the files the current date and time 5 7 2 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during recovery Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction where possible If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Numb
146. d F from all folders with the name Finance Linux By file path home user Finance F log Excludes the file named F log located in the folder home user Finance The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for recovery For example assume that you selected the folder MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the recovery process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped 5 1 5 When to recover Select when to start the recovery task Now the recovery task will be started immediately after you click OK on the Recover data page Later the recovery task will be started manually afterwards If you need to schedule the task clear the Task will be started manually check box and specify the required date and time 5 1 6 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify
147. d Unified Bootloader GRUB and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup One part of the GRUB loader resides either in the first several sectors of the disk or in the first several sectors of the volume The rest is on the file system of one of the volumes System bootability can be recovered automatically only when the GRUB resides in the first several sectors of the disk and on the file system to which direct access is possible In other cases the user has to manually reactivate the boot loader Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the configuration file The system uses Linux Loader LILO and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup LILO contains numerous references to absolute sector numbers and so cannot be repaired automatically except for the case when all data is recovered to the sectors that have the same absolute numbers as on the source disk Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the loader configuration file for the reason described in the previous item The system loader points to the wrong volume This may happen when system or boot volumes are not recovered to their original location Solution Modification of the boot ini or the boot bcd files fixes this for Windows loaders Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 does this automatically and so you are not likely to experience the problem For the GRUB and LI
148. d a license from an Acronis partner you receive a confirmation e mail with a registration code Click Enter new registration code on the same web page and register the license The license becomes available on the Initial Seeding Recovery tab A license purchased in Acronis online store becomes available immediately after the payment is processed 11 1 6 8 How to perform initial seeding 1 Make sure you have activated an Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online subscription on the machine where you will do initial seeding If you are currently using a trial subscription make sure that you also have a paid subscription available and assigned to this machine Do not use the Initial Seeding service if you do not have a paid subscription Decide on the media p 211 that you will send Attach the media to the machine you are going to back up Alternatively you can back up to a local or network folder and then copy move the backup to the media 4 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 click Create backup plan and create a backup plan on this machine Under What to back up select disks volumes or files folders you want to back up Under Where to back up specify Online Backup Storage In Backup scheme select Initial seeding Specify the said media as the backup destination Optional but strongly recommended Enable backup encryption in Backup options gt Archive protection The backup starts immediately after you click the fi
149. d across an array of three or more disks The disks do not need to be identical but there must be equally sized blocks of unallocated space available on each disk in the volume Parity a calculated value that can be used to reconstruct data in case of failure is also striped across the disk array And it is always stored on a different disk than the data itself If a physical disk fails the portion of the RAID 5 volume that was on that failed disk can be re created from the remaining data and the parity A RAID 5 volume provides reliability and is able to overcome the physical disk size limitations with a higher than mirrored disk to volume size ratio 9 7 1 2 Create volume wizard The Create volume wizard lets you create any type of volume including system and active select a file system label assign a letter and also provides other disk management functions Its pages will enable you to enter operation parameters proceeding step by step further on and return to any previous step if necessary to change any previously selected options To help you with your choices each parameter is supplemented with detailed instructions If you want to create a volume Run the Create volume wizard by selecting Create volume on the Wizards bar or right click any unallocated space and select Create volume in the appearing context menu Select the type of volume being created At the first step you have to specify the type of volume you want to crea
150. d each task created on the machine You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events occurred during backup or during recovery see Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific 10 5 4 1 SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific For detailed information about us
151. d in the same backup can be mounted within a single mount operation The mount operation is available when the console is connected to a managed machine running either Windows or Linux Mounting volumes in the read write mode enables you to modify the backup content that is save move create delete files or folders and run executables consisting of one file You can mount volumes if the disk backup is stored in a local folder excepting removable media Acronis Secure Zone or on a network share Usage scenarios Sharing mounted images can be easily shared to networked users Band aid database recovery solution mount up an image that contains an SQL database from a recently failed machine This will provide access to the database until the failed machine is recovered Offline virus clean if a machine is attacked the administrator shuts it down boots with bootable media and creates an image Then the administrator mounts this image in read write mode scans and cleans it with an antivirus program and finally recovers the machine Error check if recovery failed due to a disk error mount the image in the read write mode Then check the mounted disk for errors with the chkdsk r command To mount an image perform the following steps Source Archive p 152 Specify the path to the archive location and select the archive containing disk backups Backup p 153 Select the backup Access credentials p 154
152. data using the Data view Since the Data view tab shares the same functionality with the data catalog selecting data on the Data view tab is performed in the same way as in the catalog For more information about selecting data see Data catalog p 101 Selecting data using the Archive view 1 Expand the required archive and select one of the successive backups by its creation date and time Thus you can revert the disk data to a certain moment in time If the list of archives is too long you can filter the archives by selecting only the required type of archives to display To do this select the required archive type in the Show list 2 For disk or volume backups only in the Backup contents select the type of data to display from the drop down box Disks to recover disks as a whole with all their volumes Volumes to recover individual basic and or dynamic volumes Files to recover individual files and folders 3 Inthe Backup contents select the check boxes for the items you need to recover 4 Click OK Selecting MBR When recovering a system volume you will usually select the disk s MBR if The operating system cannot boot The disk is new and does not have MBR You are recovering custom or non Windows boot loaders such as LILO and GRUB The disk geometry is different to that stored in the backup There are probably other times when you may need to recover the MBR but the above are the most common
153. der this person s credentials The task will always run under the same credentials regardless of the user who actually starts the task if you specify the task credentials explicitly To do so on the plan task creation page 1 Inthe Plan parameters or Task parameters section click Show plan s credentials comments label or Show task credentials 2 Click Plan s Task credentials 3 Enter the credentials under which the plan task will run Scheduled or postponed start The plan task credentials are mandatory If you skip the credentials step you will be asked for credentials after finishing the plan task creation Why does the program compel me to specify credentials A scheduled or postponed task has to run anyway regardless if any user is logged on or not for example the system is at the Windows Welcome screen or a user other than the task owner is logged on It is sufficient that the machine be on that is not in standby or hibernate at the scheduled task start time That s why the Acronis scheduler needs the explicitly specified credentials to be able to start the task 3 2 User privileges on a managed machine When managing a machine running Windows the scope of a user s management rights depends on the user s privileges on the machine Regular users A regular user such as a member of the Users group has the following management rights Perform file level backup and recovery of the files that the
154. ding adding other tools to the image and so on To be able to perform any of the above operations install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK is installed If you do not have such machine prepare as described in How to create bootable media p 160 Bootable Media Builder supports only x86 WinPE 2 x or 3 0 These WinPE distributions can also work on x64 hardware PE images based on Win PE 2 x or 3 0 require at least 640 MB RAM to work Adding Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO 1 When adding the plug in to the existing Win PE ISO unpack all files of your Win PE ISO toa separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE When creating a new PE ISO Select Create Windows PE 2 x or 3 0 automatically The software runs the appropriate script and proceeds to the next window When adding the plug in to the existing PE ISO Select Use WinPE files located in the folder specify Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located 4 Specify network settings p 163 for the machine network adapters or choose DHCP auto configuration 5 optional Specify the Windows drivers to be added to Windows PE Once you boot a machine into Windows PE the d
155. disk group p 233 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 supports the following dynamic volume types RAID levels simple spanned striped RAID 0 mirrored RAID 1 a mirror of stripes RAID 0 1 RAID 5 Backing up dynamic volumes Dynamic volumes are backed up in the same way as basic volumes When creating a backup plan through the GUI all types of volumes are available for selection as Items to back up When using the command line specify the dynamic volumes with the DYN prefix Command line examples acrocmd backup disk volume DYN1 DYN2 loc srv1 backups credentials netuser1 pass1 arc dyni1_2_arc This will back up volumes DYN1 and DYN2 to a network shared folder acrocmd backup disk volume DYN loc srvi backups credentials netuser1 pass1 arc alldyn_arc This will back up all dynamic volumes of the local machine to a network shared folder Recovering dynamic volumes A dynamic volume can be recovered Over any type of existing volume To unallocated space of a disk group To unallocated space of a basic disk Toa disk which has not been initialized Recovery over an existing volume When a dynamic volume is recovered over an existing volume either basic or dynamic the target volume s data is overwritten with the backup content The type of target volume basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 will not change The target volume size has to be enough to accommodate the
156. e p 52 4 3 2 The DATE variable If you specify the DATE variable in the archive name the file name of each backup will include that backup s creation date When using this variable the first backup of a new day will be a full backup Before creating the next full backup the software deletes all backups taken earlier that day Backups taken before that day are kept This means you can store multiple full backups with or without incremental ones but no more than one full backup per day You can sort the backups by date copy move delete the backups manually or by using a script The date format is m d yyyy For example it is 1 31 2011 for January 31 2011 Note absence of leading zeros You can place this variable anywhere in the archive name You can use both lowercase and uppercase letters in this variable Examples Example 1 Suppose that you perform incremental backups twice a day at midnight and noon for two days starting on January 31 2011 If the archive name is MyArchive DATE here is the list of backup files after day two MyArchive 1 31 2011 tib full created on January 31 at midnight MyArchive 1 31 2011 2 tib incremental created on January 31 at noon MyArchive 2 1 2011 tib full created on February 1 at midnight MyArchive 2 1 2011 2 tib incremental created on February 1 at noon Example 2 Suppose that you perform full backups with the same schedule and archive name as in the previous exa
157. e Linux SWAP Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 can back up and recover corrupted or non supported file systems using the sector by sector approach 1 4 Technical Support Maintenance and Support Program If you need assistance with your Acronis product please go to http www acronis com support Product Updates You can download the latest updates for all your registered Acronis software products from our website at any time after logging into your Account https www acronis com my and registering the product See Registering Acronis Products at the Website http kb acronis com content 4834 and Acronis Website User Guide http kb acronis com content 8128 2 Getting started may Step 1 Installation These brief installation instructions enable you to start using the product quickly For the complete description of installation methods and procedures please refer to the Installation documentation Before installation make sure that Your hardware meets the system requirements You have license keys for the edition of your choice You have the setup program You can download it from the Acronis Web site To install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Run the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 setup program and follow the on screen instructions gt Step 2 Running Run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 by selecting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 from the Start menu For understanding of the GUI element
158. e Kit http technet microsoft com en us library bb457110 aspx 816307 Best practices for using dynamic disks on Windows Server 2003 based computers http support microsoft com kb 816307 Dynamic group A group of machines p 236 which is populated automatically by the management server p 237 according to membership criteria specified by the administrator Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 offers the following membership criteria m Operating system Active Directory organizational unit P address range Listed in txt csv file A machine remains in a dynamic group as long as the machine meets the group s criteria However the administrator can specify exclusions and not include certain machines in the dynamic group even if they meet the criteria Dynamic volume Any volume located on dynamic disks p 233 or more precisely on a disk group p 233 Dynamic volumes can span multiple disks Dynamic volumes are usually configured depending on the desired goal to increase the volume size a spanned volume to reduce the access time a striped volume to achieve fault tolerance by introducing redundancy mirrored and RAID 5 volumes E Encrypted archive A backup archive p 228 encrypted according to the Advanced Encryption Standard AES When the encryption option and a password for the archive are set in the backup options p 228 each backup belonging to the archive is encrypted by the agent p 228 befo
159. e Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a full backup For example the full backup can be set up to run every Sunday at 1 00 AM as soon as all users are logged off Incremental backup Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform an schedule incremental backup If the archive contains no backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the incremental backup Differential backup schedule Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a differential backup If the archive contains no full backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the differential backup Clean up archive Specifies how to get rid of old backups either to apply retention rules p 69 regularly or clean up the archive during a backup when the destination location runs out of space By default the retention rules are not specified which means older backups will not be deleted automatically Using retention rules Specify the retention rules and when to apply them This setting is recommended for backup destinations such as shared folders or centralized vaults When there is insufficient space while backing up The archive will be cleaned up only during backup and only if there is not enough space to create a new backup In this case the software will act as follows Delete the oldest full backup with all dependent incremental differential backu
160. e archive or backup you have chosen to delete has the check mark Review the archive or backup that you have selected to delete If you need to delete other archives and backups select the respective check boxes then click Delete selected and confirm the deletion What happens if I delete a backup that is a base of an incremental or differential backup To preserve archive consistency the program will consolidate the two backups For example you delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When you delete an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain the resulting backup type will be incremental Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup There should be enough space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation Backups resulting from consolidation always have maximum compression 8 Bootable media Bootable media Bootable media is physical media CD DVD USB drive or other media supported by a machine BIOS as a boot device that boots on any PC compatible machine and enables you to run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent either in a Linux based environment or Windows Preinstallati
161. e based provider that supports the source volume If none is found VSS will use the Microsoft Software Shadow Copy provider Software Select automatically In most cases VSS will use the Microsoft Software Shadow Copy provider Software Acronis VSS Provider VSS will use Acronis VSS Provider for taking snapshots Software System provider VSS will use the system provider Microsoft Software Shadow Copy provider for taking snapshots Software A software provider VSS will use any available software based provider that supports the source volume Hardware Select automatically VSS will use the hardware based provider that supports the source volume If no hardware based provider is found snapshots will be created by means of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Do not use VSS If you select Do not use VSS the data snapshot will be taken by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Choose Do not use VSS if your database is incompatible with VSS Backup process is fastest but data consistency of the applications whose transactions are not completed at the time of taking a snapshot cannot be guaranteed You may use Pre Post data capture commands p 91 to indicate which commands should be performed before and after taking the snapshot This ensures that the data is being backed up in a consistent state For instance specify pre data capture commands that will suspend the database and flush all caches to ensure that all transactions are com
162. e destination In the Path field enter the full path to the destination or select the desired destination in the location tree as described in Selecting backup destinations p 45 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive Once you select the archive destination the program generates a name for the new archive and displays it in the Name field The name commonly looks like Archive N where N is a sequence number The generated name is unique within the selected location If you are satisfied with the automatically generated name click OK Otherwise enter another unique name Backing up to an existing archive You can configure the backup plan to back up to an existing archive To do so select the archive in the archives table or type the archive name in the Name field If the archive is protected with a password the program will ask for it in the pop up window By selecting the existing archive you are meddling in the area of another backup plan that uses the archive This is not an issue if the other plan is discontinued However you should generally follow the rule
163. e dosed oes E E E aE a T Seeded es 197 10 1 6 Task activity details anniina naaa aaan daaa 198 aKo rA LOB E E BAA EEE EE E E S 199 10 2 1 Actions ON loe Entries in enaa a aaa pataa orreri va kasira eraki 199 10 2 2 L g entry detalll tininctenian dedi nntuiiacin a iia ivi iain ATi ATA ANENA 200 y k0 Fee Rin AN Fol chee ee RRR RRR EES ECE A AAA ECE ECE ECE ECE 200 10 4 Collecting systemd information censerent iiiiiii t E e E EEEE E E e E EE 201 10 5 Adjusting Machine Options e reen EAE TEATE 201 10 5 1 Customer Experience Progra Minieri aaao a ear ANTEA EAE EREE ET EEE VE E 202 TOI 25 SAIS E E EEE A TRETAT TUTAPATA APERE OEE 202 105 3 E mail NOtIfICItION Saia a a a a ariii 203 105 4 Ev nttracing nnii ae aeaee aaa aa eiei eea iaieiiea iee neinean 204 10 55 Log Cleanup rulesias eves de eae Meal fal est e e e e Pech healed ect al Me ces 206 10 5 6 Online backUP prOXy iciinicteitiees disatieshathaneaianidiatnin ctiaiiaatintiad niin titiatihtvaitteavsiae 206 DT Ombime DAch T e EESE SE E EA EEEE cate cade cats EE EE E E E E 208 11 1 Introduction to Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online cccccccccsssssssseeeeeeecaaeeeseeeeeeeesaaaanees 208 11 1 1 What is Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online ccccccsccsscsscesscssecsecessessecsesesecssecsecesecessceeesseessceeeeseees 208 11 1 2 What data can I back up and recover oo ececcscesseseeseeseeseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaesaecaessessessecaeeseeaeeaeeaes 208
164. e in size 4 6 3 How regular conversion to VM works The way the repeated conversions work depends on where you choose to create the virtual machine If you choose to save the virtual machine as a set of files each conversion re creates the virtual machine from scratch If you choose to create the virtual machine on a virtualization server when converting an incremental or differential backup the software updates the existing virtual machine instead of re creating it Such conversion is normally faster It saves network traffic and CPU resource of the host that performs the conversion If updating the virtual machine is not possible the software re creates it from scratch The following is a detailed description of both cases If you choose to save the virtual machine as a set of files As a result of the first conversion a new virtual machine will be created Every subsequent conversion will re create this machine from scratch First a new temporary virtual machine is created If this operation succeeds the old machine is replaced If an error occurs during creation of the temporary machine the temporary machine is deleted This way the conversion always ends up with a single machine However extra storage space is required during conversion to store the temporary machine If you choose to create the virtual machine on a virtualization server The first conversion creates a new virtual machine Any subsequent conversion works
165. e level backup of all supported file systems The option defines which files and folders to skip during the backup process and thus exclude from the list of backed up items The preset is Exclude files matching the following criteria tmp bak To specify which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters Exclude all hidden files and folders This option is effective only for file systems that are supported by Windows Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded Exclude all system files and folders This option is effective only for file systems that are supported by Windows Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files and folders whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk sub
166. e new virtual machine The memory adjustment range depends on the host hardware the host operating system and the virtualization product settings For example virtual machines may be allowed to use no more than 30 of memory Disks Initial setting the number and size of the source machine s disks The number of disks is generally equal to that of the source machine It might be different if the program has to add more disks to accommodate the source machine volumes because of limitations set by the virtualization product You can add virtual disks to the machine configuration or in some cases delete the proposed disks When adding a new virtual disk along with interface and capacity you can specify its format Thin format The disk occupies as much storage space as the data it stores This saves the storage space To enable thin format select the Thin provisioning for ESX or Dynamically expanding disk for Hyper V check box Thick format The disk occupies all the provisioned storage space This improves the virtual machine performance To use thick format clear the Thin provisioning for ESX or Dynamically expanding disk for Hyper V check box The default setting is thick format if a physical machine was backed up When recovering from a virtual machine backup the software tries to reproduce the format of the original machine s disks If this is not possible thick format is used Implementation of Xen machines is b
167. e node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Node A server aimed to optimize usage of various resources required for protection of enterprise data This goal is achieved by organizing managed vaults p 237 Storage Node enables the administrator to usea single centralized catalog p 232 of data stored in the managed vaults relieve managed machines p 237 of unnecessary CPU load by performing cleanup p 231 validation p 239 and other operations with backup archives p 228 which otherwise would be performed by agents p 228 drastically reduce backup traffic and storage space taken by the archives p 228 by using deduplication p 232 prevent access to the backup archives even in case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by a malefactor by using encrypted vaults p 235 T Task A set of actions to be performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 at a certain time or event The actions are described in a non human readable service file The time or event schedule is stored in the protected registry keys in Windows or on the file system in Linux Tower of Hanoi A popular backup scheme p 229 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 228 size and the number of recovery points p 238 available from the archive Unlike the GFS p 235 scheme that has only three levels of recovery resolution daily weekly monthly resolution the Tower of Hanoi scheme continuously reduc
168. e options To select whether to send the recovery operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Send SNMP notifications individually for recovery operation events to send the events of the recovery operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the recovery operations to SNMP managers 5 7 3 2 Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the ev
169. e recovery is completed the recovered operating system goes online automatically If the machine fails to boot or if you need to recover a system to bare metal boot the machine using the bootable media and configure the recovery operation in the same way as the recovery task ra Step 6 Management The Navigation pane at the left part of the console enables you to navigate across the product Vv iews that are used for different administering purposes Use the Backup plans and tasks view to manage backup plans and tasks run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their states and progress Use the F Alerts view to rapidly identify and solve the problems Use the Log view to browse the operations log The location where you store backup archives is called a vault p 240 Navigate to the Vaults p 135 view to obtain information about your vaults Navigate further to the specific vault to view backups and their contents You can also select the data to recover and perform manual operations with backups mounting validating deleting 2 1 Using the management console As soon as the console connects to a managed machine p 237 or to a management server p 237 the respective items appear across the console s workspace in the menu in the main area with the Welcome screen or in the Navigation pane enabling you to perform agent specific or server specific operations amp Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11
170. e that will produce monthly full backups weekly differential backups and daily incremental backups Then the backup schedule can look as follows Full backup Schedule Monthly every Last Sunday of the month at 9 00 PM Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 7 00 PM Differential Schedule Weekly every Saturday at 8 00 PM Further we want to add conditions that have to be satisfied for a backup task to start This is set up in the Conditions fields for each backup type Full backup Conditions Location available Incremental Conditions User is logged off Differential Conditions User is idle As a result a full backup originally scheduled at 9 00 PM may actually start later as soon as the backup location becomes available Likewise backup tasks for incremental and differential backups will wait until all users are logged off and users are idle respectively Finally we create retention rules for the archive let us retain only backups that are no older than six months and let the cleanup be performed after each backup task and also on the last day of every month Retention rules Delete backups older than 6 months Apply the rules After backing up On schedule Cleanup schedule Monthly on the Last day of All months at 10 00 PM By default a backup is not deleted as long as it has dependent backups that must be kept For example if a full backup has become subject to deletion but there are incremental or different
171. eared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Continue the N A Continue the backup after the backup concurrent Continue the backup p P y command is with the command only after the executed despite execution and command is command irrespective of the successfully execution failure command execution executed Delete the or success result TIB file and temporary files and fail the task if the command execution fails A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 4 7 19 Replication cleanup inactivity time This option is effective only if you set up replication or retention rules p 66 for the backups This option defines a time period when starting replication or applying retention rules is not allowed The operations will be performed when the inactivity time ends if the machine is powered on at that moment The operations that had started before the inactivity time began continue without interruption The inactivity time affects all locations including the primary one The preset is Disabled To specify the inactivity time select the Do not start replication cleanup within the following time check box and then select the days and the time period during the day Usage example You may want to use this option to separate the backup process from replication or cleanup For examp
172. ease refer to How long will my backups be kept in the online storage p 209 Normally there is no need to start and stop the cleanup task manually But it is possible to do so in the Backup plans and tasks view 11 1 5 7 How to make a recovered machine recognize its subscription When you recover a physical machine from a backup a new machine identifier is created Therefore the machine is not able to back up to the subscription it used before recovery To continue backing up the machine to the same subscription reassign p 222 the subscription to the machine If you do this the next machine s backup can be incremental If you assign a new subscription to the machine the software will have to do a new full backup 11 1 6 Initial Seeding FAQ This section explains what Initial Seeding is why you would want to use it and provides some usage details 11 1 6 1 What is Initial Seeding Initial Seeding is an extra service that lets you save an initial full backup locally and then send it to Acronis on a hard disk drive Acronis uploads the backup to the online storage After that you can add incremental backups to this full backup either manually or ona schedule The hard disk drive is sent back to you but it is not possible to recover from it However recovery from a locally attached device is possible with the Large scale recovery p 215 option 11 1 6 2 Why would I want to use Initial Seeding This service helps you s
173. ecovering a system to a new virtual machine recovering a system to any virtual machine by means of Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V Universal Restore is not available when the backup is located in Acronis Secure Zone you have chosen to use Acronis Active Restore p 227 This is because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Without recovery Under bootable media you can also use Universal Restore without recovery by clicking Apply Universal Restore in the media welcome screen Universal Restore will be applied to the operating system that already exists on the machine If there are multiple operating systems you are prompted to choose the one to apply Universal Restore to 52a Universal Restore in Windows Preparation Prepare drivers Before applying Universal Restore to a Windows operating system make sure that you have the drivers for the new HDD controller and the chipset These drivers are critical to start the operating system Use the CD or DVD supplied by the hardware vendor or download the drivers from the vendor s Web site The driver files should have the inf sys or oem extensions If you download the drivers in the exe cab or zip format extract them using a third party application The best practice is to store drivers for all the hardware used in your organization in a single repository sorted by device type or by the hardware configurations You can k
174. ed backup schemes such as GFS and Tower of Hanoi to create a custom backup scheme or to back up data once Bootable agent A bootable rescue utility that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent p 228 Bootable agent is based on Linux kernel A machine p 236 can be booted into a bootable agent using either bootable media p 229 or Acronis PXE Server Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 231 Bootable media A physical media CD DVD USB flash drive or other media supported by a machine p 236 as a boot device that contains the bootable agent p 229 or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE p 240 with the Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 227 A machine can also be booted into the above environments using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Windows Deployment Service WDS These servers with uploaded bootable components can also be thought of as a kind of bootable media Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes p 234 on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk that has an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently lock
175. ed by the running applications or for any other reason Built in group A group of machines permanently located on a management server p 237 Built in groups cannot be deleted moved to other groups or manually modified Custom groups cannot be created within built in groups There is no way to remove a machine from the built in group except by removing the machine from the management server C Cataloging Cataloging a backup p 228 adds the contents of the backup to the data catalog p 232 Backups are cataloged automatically by the agent p 228 as soon as they are created A user has the option to turn off automatic cataloging and start it manually when appropriate Backups that are stored ona storage node p 239 will be cataloged by the node in this case Centralized backup plan A backup plan p 229 that is deployed to a managed machine p 237 from the management server p 237 Such plan can be modified only by editing the original backup plan on the management server Centralized management Management of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 infrastructure through a central management unit known as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server p 237 The centralized management operations include creating centralized backup plans p 230 for the registered machines p 238 and groups of machines creating and managing static p 238 and dynamic groups p 234 of machines p 236 managing the task
176. edia was not requested Your media has been shipped back the carrier and the tracking number are specified If a prepaid shipping label was not provided with the media the media will be discarded Occasional The order is on hold Your order was placed on hold due to technical difficulties processing the order Acronis is working on resolving these issues Occasional The order has been cancelled The order had been cancelled before the media was shipped so returning the media is not required Occasional The order has been cancelled The media has been returned or Returning the media was not requested The order was cancelled while the media was in the datacenter The media has been shipped back the carrier and the tracking number are specified If a prepaid shipping label was not provided with the media the media will be discarded 11 1 7 Large Scale Recovery FAQ This section explains what Large Scale Recovery is why you would want to use it and provides some usage details 11 1 7 1 What is Large Scale Recovery Large Scale Recovery is an extra service that enables you to obtain a copy of the backups you have in the online storage You can then recover data from this copy Once you order Large Scale Recovery for a particular machine Acronis sends you a USB hard disk drive with all of the backups made from this machine You can recover data directly from the disk or copy the backups to a local or network
177. edicated area of the hard disk You can recover the machine from the network folder if the machine s hard disk drive fails 4 5 6 2 Example 2 Limiting the age and total size of stored backups Consider the following scenario You want to perform a weekly full backup of your machine You want to keep all backups that are younger than a month You want to keep even older backups as long as the total size of all backups stays below 200 GB In this scenario create a backup plan with the Custom scheme When creating the backup plan specify a weekly schedule for the full backup In Clean up archive select Using retention rules Click Retention rules select the Backups older than and the Archive size greater than check boxes and specify respectively 1 month and 200 GB In If the specified conditions are met select Delete the oldest backups Click OK In Apply retention rules select the After backup check box Result Backups that are younger than one month are kept regardless of their total size Backups that are older than one month are kept only if the total size of all backups older plus younger does not exceed 200 GB Otherwise the software deletes some or all of the older backups starting from the oldest one 4 6 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine When creating a backup plan p 29 you can set up regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine By setting up regular conversi
178. ee the Windows Preinstallation Environment User s Guide Winpe chm 8 1 4 Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution Get the Bart PE builder Install Bootable Media Builder from the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 setup file Change the current folder to the folder where the Acronis Plug in for WinPE is installed by default C Program Files Acronis Bootable Components WinPE If the plug in is installed in a folder other than the default folder change the path accordingly check the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis Bootable Components Settings WinPE for the plug in location Unpack the WinPE zip file to the current folder 5 Run the following command make_plugin vbs As a result a folder named acronis will be created in the current directory Copy the acronis folder to the BartPE folder plugins folder Insert your Windows distribution CD if you do not have a copy of Windows installation files on the HDD Start the Bart PE builder Specify the path to the Windows installation files or Windows distribution CD 10 Click Plugins and check whether the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 plug in is enabled Enable if disabled 11 Specify the output folder and the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name or the media to create 12 Build the Bart PE 13 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD if this has not been done yet or copy to a flash drive Once the machine boots into the B
179. een attempts t N 3 none of attempts succeeded Failed Failed Failed Failed lde Running Idle Running Ide Running idle Task state kj If the task fails because of a mistake in the backup plan you can edit the plan while the task is in the Idle state While the task is running you have to stop it prior to editing the backup plan 4 7 22 Task start conditions This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media This option determines the program behavior in case a backup task is about to start the scheduled time comes or the event specified in the schedule occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met For more information on conditions please see Scheduling p 53 and Conditions p 63 The preset is Wait until the conditions are met Wait until the conditions are met With this setting the scheduler starts monitoring the conditions and launches the task as soon as the conditions are met If the conditions are never met the task will never start To handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is becoming risky you can set the time interval after which the task will run irrespective of the condition Select the Run the task anyway after check box and specify the time interval The task will start as soon as the conditions are met OR the maximum time delay laps
180. eep a copy of the repository on a DVD or a flash drive pick some drivers and add them to the bootable media create the custom bootable media with the necessary drivers and the necessary network configuration for each of your servers Or you can simply specify the path to the repository every time Universal Restore is used Check access to the drivers in bootable environment Make sure you have access to the device with drivers when working under bootable media Even if you configure system disk recovery in a Windows environment the machine will reboot and recovery will proceed in the Linux based environment Use WinPE based media if the device is available in Windows but Linux based media does not detect it What if you do not have drivers Windows 7 includes more drivers than the older Windows operating systems There is a great chance that Universal Restore finds all necessary drivers in the Windows 7 driver folder So you may not necessarily have to specify the external path to the drivers Nevertheless performing Universal Restore is critical so the system uses the correct drivers The Windows default driver storage folder is determined in the registry value DevicePath which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion This storage folder is usually WINDOWS inf Universal Restore settings Automatic driver search Specify where the program will search for the Hardware Abstractio
181. efore backup This will not work Use the alternative setting Clean up archive gt When there is insufficient space while backing up p 39 if you accept the risk of losing the last backup Deleting or moving backups with dependencies To access this setting click Show advanced settings in the Retention Rules window Retention rules presume deleting or moving some backups while retaining the others What if the archive contains incremental and differential backups that depend on each other and on the full backups they are based on You cannot say delete an outdated full backup and keep its incremental children When deletion or movement of a backup affects other backups one of the following rules is applied Retain the backup until all dependent backups become subject to deletion movement The outdated backup will be kept until all backups that depend on it also become outdated Then all the chain will be deleted at once during the regular cleanup If you chose moving outdated backups to the next location the backup will be copied there without delay Only its deletion from the current location is postponed This mode helps to avoid the potentially time consuming consolidation but requires extra space for storing backups whose deletion is postponed The archive size and or the backup age or number can exceed the values you specify Consolidate these backups The software will consolidate the backup that is subject to delet
182. elect activities or display Events and select log entries entries to a file 2 Click EY Save selected to file 3 Inthe opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries of the selected activities or selected log entries will be saved to the specified file Save all the log entries 1 Make sure that the filters are not set to a file z 2 Click A Save all to file 3 In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries will be saved to the specified file Save all the filtered log 1 Set filters to get a list of the log entries that satisfy the filtering criteria entries to a file 2 Click A Save all to file 3 In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file All log entries in the list will be saved to the specified file Delete all the log entries Click Clear log All the log entries will be deleted from the log and a new log entry will be created It will contain information about who deleted the log entries and when 10 2 2 Log entry details Displays detailed information on the log entry you have selected and lets you copy the details to the clipboard To view details of the next or the previous log entry click the down arrow button or correspondingly the up arrow button To copy the details click the Copy to clipboard button Log entry data fields A log entry contains the following data fields Type Type of event Error Warning
183. elect the location where to replicate the backups A backup is replicated to the next location as soon as it appears in the previous location If allowed by the backup scheme you can also specify when to automatically delete the backups from each of the locations 4 5 3 Setting up retention of backups You can set retention rules for backups when creating a backup plan p 29 The available retention rules depend on the chosen backup scheme Applying retention rules can be restricted by the Replication cleanup inactivity time p 70 option Simple scheme Each backup is retained until its age exceeds a limit you specify Then it is either deleted or moved To set up deleting the backups In Retention rules select Delete backups older than and then specify the retention period To set up moving the backups In Retention rules select Move backups older than specify the retention period Under Where to replicate move backups specify the location The retention rules are applied after creating a backup For the second and next locations creating a backup means copying or moving a backup there from the previous location Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Backups of each type daily weekly and monthly are retained for the periods you specify in Keep backups and then deleted The retention rules are applied after creating a backup They are applied sequentially in the primary the second and all next locations
184. else 11 1 5 Backup and recovery FAQ This section answers questions related to backup and recovery processes 11 1 5 1 What backup methods are available Full and incremental backup methods are available through the following backup schemes Run now immediate start or Manual start postponed start On the first task run a full backup is created If you run the backup task again an incremental backup will be created Simple start on schedule The first backup is full the later backups are incremental With this backup scheme you can set up a retention rule to automatically delete old backups An additional backup scheme that is available only for online storage is Initial seeding This is the Run now scheme using local destination and full backup method To use this scheme you need a license for the Initial Seeding p 210 service 11 1 5 2 Is the online storage available under Acronis bootable media Recovery from Acronis Online Backup Storage is available but backup to the storage is not 11 1 5 3 Can I use Acronis Universal Restore when recovering a system from the online storage Yes Acronis Universal Restore is always available when recovering a system from the online storage Using Acronis Universal Restore when recovering from other types of storage will require a separate license 11 1 5 4 What if a network connection is lost during online backup or recovery The software will try to reach the online storage eve
185. ent console 2 Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices in a Linux based media or Run the iSCSI Setup in a PE based media Specify the IP address and port of the iSCSI device s host and the name of the iSCSI initiator If the host requires authentication specify the user name and password for it Click OK Select the iSCSI device from the list and then click Connect Dg Oe 08 If prompted specify the user name and password to access the iSCSI device To add an NDAS device 1 Ina Linux based bootable media run the management console Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices In NDAS devices click Add device Specify the 20 character device ID gv PO S If you want to allow writing data onto the device specify the five character write key Without this key the device will be available in the read only mode 6 Click OK 8 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media Linux based bootable media contains the following commands and command line utilities which you can use when running a command shell To start the command shell press CTRL ALT F2 while in the bootable media s management console Acronis command line utilities acrocmd acronis asamba lash Linux commands and utilities busybox cat cdrecord chmod chown chroot cp dd df dmesg dmraid e2fsck e2label echo egrep fdisk fsck fxload gawk gpm grep growisofs grub gunzip halt hexdump hotplug ifconfig
186. ent for ESX i is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before the recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disks volumes Map automatically Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 attempts to map the selected disks to the target disks as described in the How the automatic mapping works p 105 section If you are unsatisfied with the mapping result you can re map disks manually To do this you have to unmap the disks ina reverse order that is the last mapped disk should be unmapped first Then map the disks manually as described below Disk Disk MODEL p 104 Select the destination disk for each of the source disks NT signature p 104 Select the way the recovered disk s signature will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Disk destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select a disk where you want the selected disk to recover to The destination disk s space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target disk will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need NT signature
187. ents to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the recovery operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Select one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Log the following event types to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log 5 7 4 File level security This option is effective only for recovery from file level backup of Windows files This option defines whether to recover NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Recover files with their security settings If the file NTFS permissions were preserved during backup p 86 you can choose whether to recover the permissions or let the files inherit the NTFS permissions from the folder to which they are recovered 5 7 5 Mount points This option is effective only in Windows for recovering data from a file level backup Enable the Mount points option to recover files and folders that were stored on the mounted volumes and were backed up with the enabled Mount points option For details of backing up
188. er p 237 The option defines whether to alert if no backup was performed on a given machine for a period of time You can configure the time period that is considered critical for your business The preset is alert if the last successful backup on a machine was completed more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts view of the Navigation pane When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last backup column s value for each machine Last connection This option is effective when the console is connected to the management server or to a registered machine p 238 The option defines whether to alert if no connection was established between a registered machine and the management server for a period of time so indicating that the machine might not be centrally managed for instance in the case of network connection failure to that machine You can configure the length of time that is considered critical The preset is alert if the machine s last connection to the management server was more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts view of the Navigation pane When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last connect column s value for each machine 10 5 3 E mail notifications The option enables you to configure e mail notifications The preset is Disabled To configure e mail
189. er data from a backup Examine backup content Validate all archives in the vault or individual archives or backups Mount a volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk Safely delete archives and backups from the archives Creating vaults is highly recommended but is not obligatory You may choose not to use the shortcuts and always specify the location path Creating a vault results in adding the vault name to the Vaults section of the Navigation pane Vaults view Vaults on the navigation pane top item of the vaults tree Click this item to display centralized and personal vaults To perform actions on any vault use the toolbar that is located at the top of the Vaults view See the Actions on personal vaults p 137 section EP Personal vaults These vaults available when the console is connected to a managed machine Click any vault in the vaults tree to open the detailed view of this vault p 136 and to take actions on archives p 155 and backups p 156 stored in there 6 1 1 Working with vaults This section briefly describes the main GUI elements of the selected vault and suggests ways to work with them Examining information on a vault Information about the selected vault is located at the top pane of the selected vault Using the stacked bar you can estimate the vault s load The vault s load is the proportion of the vault s free space and occupied space not available if the vault is
190. er of attempts 30 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the network location becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the location every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first 5 7 3 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the recovery operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers Brad SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the recovery operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent For detailed information about using SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 please see Support for SNMP p 28 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machin
191. er of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the backup destination on the network becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the destination every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Ignore bad sectors The preset is Disabled When the option is disabled the program will display a pop up window each time it comes across a bad sector and ask for a user decision as to whether to continue or stop the backup procedure In order to back up the valid information on a rapidly dying disk enable ignoring bad sectors The rest of the data will be backed up and you will be able to mount the resulting disk backup and extract valid files to another disk 4 7 9 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the backup operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers 4 7 9 1 SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the backup operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the type
192. er physical parameters have been changed after backup Changing the volume letter or label does not prevent the software from recognizing the volume If the disk or volume is recovered to a different location When recovering disks The software checks the target disks for size and volumes A target disk must contain no volumes and its size must be large enough to place the disk being recovered Not initialized target disks will be initialized automatically If the required disks cannot be found you have to map the disks manually When recovering volumes The software checks the target disks for unallocated space If there is enough unallocated space the volumes will be recovered as is If unallocated space on the target disks is less than the size of the volumes being recovered the volumes will be proportionally shrunk by decreasing their free space in order to fit the unallocated space If the shrunk volumes still cannot fit the unallocated space you have to map the volumes manually 5 1 4 2 Selecting target volumes Available volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below New vir
193. er recovery turn off A MBR disk the UEFI mode in BIOS Otherwise the operating system cannot be booted UEFI OS The convertible OS Additional steps convertible will be automatically converted to support BIOS booting 1 Before recovery turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Original Target hardware system BIOS BIOS UEFI UEFI Disk MBR Disk GPT Disk MBR Disk GPT UEFI 2 Perform the Solution OS non Solution eee unar Hie Recover the operating bootable media convertible system to a GPT disk Recover the operating of system to a GPT disk After recovery turn on the UEFI mode in BIOS Otherwise the operating system cannot be booted 5 3 2 Recovering disks Let s assume you backed up a whole disk with all its volumes and want to recover this disk to a different target platform The ability of the recovered system to boot up in different modes depends on the operating systems installed on the source disk Operating systems can be convertible i e allow changing the boot mode from BIOS to UEFI and back or be non convertible For the list of convertible operating systems see Recovering volumes p 114 When a source disk contains one or more operating systems and all of them are convertible the boot mode can be automatically changed Depending on the current boot mode the target disk may be initialized either to GPT or to MBR partitioning style If at least one operating system on a source
194. er the events to be logged in the Application Event Log of Windows All events all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only To disable this option clear the Log events check box 10 5 5 Log cleanup rules This option specifies how to clean up the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 agent log This option defines the maximum size of the agent log folder in Windows XP 2003 Server ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery MMS LogEvents The preset is Maximum log size 50 MB On cleanup keep 95 of the maximum log size When the option is enabled the program compares the actual log size with the maximum size after every 100 log entries Once the maximum log size is exceeded the program deletes the oldest log entries You can select the amount of log entries to retain The default 95 setting will keep most of the log With the minimum 1 setting the log will be nearly cleared This parameter can also be set by using Acronis Administrative Template 10 5 6 Online backup proxy This option is effective only for backup to and recovery from Acronis Online Backup Storage over the Internet This option defines whether the Acronis agent will connect to the Internet through a proxy server Note Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online supports only HTTP and HTTPS proxy servers To set up proxy server settings 1 Select the Use a proxy server check box 2 In Address s
195. ers after the first successful backup performed by the backup plan The DRP will be created and sent again after the first successful backup in the following cases The backup plan has been edited so that the DRP parameters changed The backup contains new data items or does not contain items previously backed up This does not apply to such data items as files or folders If multiple machines are protected by a backup plan then a separate DRP is sent for each machine DRP and post backup commands Note that the DRP will not automatically change if post backup commands in your backup plan copy or move the backups from the original location The DRP points only to the locations specified in the backup plan Adding information to a DRP template You can append additional information to a DRP template if you are well familiar with XML and HTML The default paths to the DRP template are ProgramFiles Acronis BackupAndRecovery drp xsl in 32 bit Windows ProgramFiles x86 Acronis BackupAndRecovery drp xsl in 64 bit Windows usr lib Acronis BackupAndRecovery drp xsl in Linux To set up sending DRPs 1 Select the Send disaster recovery plan check box 2 Enter the e mail address in the E mail Address field You can enter several e mail addresses ina semicolon delimited format 3 Optional Change the default value of the Subject field if necessary If you back up multiple machines with one centralized backup plan and wa
196. ert notifications specify the SMTP server settings in the E mail notifications p 203 To configure alert notifications 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box 2 Inthe E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 3 Inthe Subject field type the notification subject or leave the default value Select the necessary notification method Per alert the notification will be sent as soon as a new alert occurs Select the As soon as an alert appears check box Click Select the types of alerts to specify the types of alerts to receive notifications about On schedule the notification including all alerts that have occurred over a certain period of time To receive notifications on schedule Select the On schedule check box Click Select the types of alerts to specify the types of alerts to receive notifications about Click Notification schedule to set up the notification frequency and time Click OK Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct 10 5 4 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events generated by the agent s operating on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers If you do not modify the event tracing options anywhere except for here your settings will be effective for each local backup plan an
197. erver A central server that drives data protection within the enterprise network Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server provides the administrator with asingle entry point to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 infrastructure an easy way to protect data on numerous machines p 236 using centralized backup plans p 230 and grouping enterprise wide monitoring and reporting functionality the ability to create centralized vaults p 231 for storing enterprise backup archives p 228 the ability to manage storage nodes p 239 the centralized catalog p 232 of all data stored on the storage nodes If there are multiple management servers on the network they operate independently manage different machines and use different centralized vaults for storing archives Media builder A dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 229 p Personal vault A local or networked vault p 240 created using direct management p 232 Once a personal vault is created a shortcut to it appears on the managed machine in the Vaults list Multiple machines can use the same physical location for example a network share as a personal vault Plan See Backup plan p 229 R Recovery point Date and time to which the backed up data can be reverted to Registered machine A machine p 236 managed by a management server p 237 A machine can be registered on only one management server at a time A mac
198. ery The Backup cataloging option defines whether the backups will be cataloged automatically as soon as they are created The preset is Enabled After the cataloging has been completed the catalog will show all data contained in the just created backup namely Fora disk level backup disks volumes files and folders Fora file level backup files and folders You may want to disable the automatic cataloging if it tends to affect the performance of the managed machine or your backup window is too narrow If the Backup cataloging option is disabled the following data will be displayed in the catalog Fora disk level backup only disks and volumes Fora file level backup nothing To add the full content of already existing backups to the catalog you can start the cataloging manually when appropriate For more information about using data catalog see the Data catalog p 101 section 4 7 4 Backup performance Use this group of options to specify the amount of network and system resources to allocate to the backup process Backup performance options might have a more or less noticeable effect on the speed of the backup process This depends on the overall system configuration and the physical characteristics of devices the backup is being performed from or to 4 7 4 1 Backup priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The priority of a process running in a system deter
199. es depending on which comes first Time diagram Wait until conditions are met gt wajina f jiti Scheduled Time interval time or event Condition Idle Waiting Running Idle Task state E t Time i lt waiting f jiti Scheduled time or event Time interval Condition Idle Waiting Running idle Task state _ ee N gt Skip the task execution Delaying a backup might be unacceptable for example when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time Then it makes sense to skip the backup rather than wait for the conditions especially if the events occur relatively often 4 7 23 Volume Shadow Copy Service This option is effective only for Windows operating systems The option defines whether a Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS provider has to notify VSS aware applications that the backup is about to start This ensures the consistent state of all data used by the applications in particular completion of all database transactions at the moment of taking the data snapshot by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Data consistency in turn ensures that the application will be recovered in the correct state and become operational immediately after recovery The preset is Use Volume Shadow Copy Service Use VSS When Use Volume Shadow Copy Service is selected choose a snapshot provider from the following list Hardware software Select automatically selected by default VSS will use the hardwar
200. es stored in the vault Cleanup Deleting backups p 228 from a backup archive p 228 or moving them to a different location in order to get rid of outdated backups or prevent the archive from exceeding the desired size Cleanup consists ofapplying retention rules p 238 to an archive The retention rules are set by the backup plan p 229 that produces the archive Cleanup may or may not result in deleting or moving backups depending on whether the retention rules are violated or not Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Console A tool for remote or local access to Acronis agents p 228 and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server p 237 Having connected the console to the management server the administrator sets up centralized backup plans p 230 and accesses other management server functionality that is performs centralized management p 230 Using the direct console agent connection the administrator performs direct management p 232 Consolidation Combining two or more subsequent backups p 228 belonging to the same archive p 228 into a single backup Consolidation might be needed when deleting backups either manually or during cleanup p 231 For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup p 235 that has expired but retain the next incremental p 236 one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup
201. es the time interval between recovery points as the backup age increases This allows for very efficient usage of the backup storage For more information please refer to Tower of Hanoi backup scheme p 41 U Unmanaged vault Any vault p 240 that is not a managed vault p 237 V Validation An operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup p 228 Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive While the successful validation means a high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery under the bootable media to a spare hard drive can guarantee successful recovery in the future Vault A place for storing backup archives p 228 A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive or detachable media such as an external USB drive There are no settings for limiting a vault size or the number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup p 231 but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Virtual machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server p 237 a machine p 236 is considered virtual if it can be backed up fro
202. esseseesecseeaeeseesecseesecsecsecsesseeaeeaeeseeaeeaeeaseaeeas 74 AT o Default PIKUPO UO AERAR nn ele kee AE Se A 8 AANA AAAA es NNANA 75 ATT Additional Settings nieis eiri anid lea teiie tel ianteteateveedteddaviddeataviedeniavirilat 77 AZ 2 RPCHIVE PROTECTION PEA AAA DOL Se PIs SE TEENIE BEE Ren cos 78 Aa Backuip catalOgingets Asics detec hsiteset Aes k RANA RAIA RARER SANE BONES AN GEASS GUS SEN GEESE A 79 ATA Backup PerrormManCe izcsccvecseereccccecssccscevccccveevsccesccstuccuscasccsuareuscdl ccteccessddbecsedtesseascaitarduvasdcieateleedecivaresveds 79 A735 BaCkUp Splitting 2 ccctieteste terre TENES ANAT VAAT OR AA OR ATA TOLRE teed 81 47 6 Compression level innnan anaa aaa aaa hah cai haiti aaah ds hake 82 4 7 7 Disaster recovery plan DRP cccccccsscssscssccsscesscssecsscesscssecseeesecesecsesessessecsesesecssecsesesecesecsaeceseseseaeenees 82 4 7 8 Error handling ccciscteaincindedetindediadadadadiadiiin A N AAA AE 83 4 7 9 BAE a Lol a A E EEA EEE A EA A TER 84 4 7 10 Fast incremental differential backup cccsecessesessssessssseecsseecsecscsessesesseeessesecseceessssesessseesaeeesseseeseeasens 85 4 7 11 File level backup Snapshot cccsccscsscscsscssesssescssssscessesessscsecsesseesecsseseesecsecsecsecsecseesesseeaesaesaesaesaesaesaesas 85 A T 12 File leVelSECUMtV TAA ca ate ath A RA A ARR AAT At A Alt i te eS ts 86 A713 Media COMPONENTS tsi cisi cds sscsd ects heats akesteastiaatet
203. etters to volumes that are inaccessible to Windows such as to those other than FAT and NTFS 5 1 4 3 Selecting target location for files and folders Where to recover Destination Select a location to recover the backed up files to Original location Files and folders will be recovered to the same path s as they are in the backup For example if you have backed up all files and folders in C Documents Finance Reports the files will be recovered to the same path If the folder does not exist it will be created automatically New location Files will be recovered to the location that you specify in the tree The files and folders will be recovered without recreating a full path unless you clear the Recover without full path check box Recovery agent Select Acronis Agent that will perform file recovery The agent selection is available only when the software cannot detect the agent on the machine the files will be recovered to Overwriting Choose what to do if the program finds in the target folder a file with the same name as in the archive Overwrite existing file this will give the file in the backup priority over the file on the hard disk Overwrite existing file if it is older this will give priority to the most recent file modification whether it be in the backup or on the disk Do not overwrite existing file this will give the file on the hard disk priority over the file in the backup If you allow files t
204. evsescescesceveesees ivi ceeccesncascaduvescearaidatesedal davvatessdal dadbar dated ccinatdasdatdeidurdatedlecnateutediene 180 9 7 2 gt Delete VOlUMG tits ramennen ere Svcd bree Anal ania salsa user atin totaal ee sore tae 184 927 3 wSetactivevoluMen inuinu iaa aiaa aaa adan ah Sh a laa 185 97 4 Chang Volume letterone a AR A A a aides 185 9 7 5 Changevolume label cartin i iasi AEO AA EEEa AS EAE A A N 186 97736 Formatvol Messanennnnnnp nnan anaa les ldea das tesla gilda edendasliatsdenalasthatcdevideasbassesiscutdesdiaaten 186 9 8 Pending OPEratiONS cccccccssessscecccceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeesssesseeeeeeeeeeasesasseeeeeeeesaaaaaseeeeess 187 10 Administering a managed machine cccccccccssssccccccccccccscsseeessscssessssssesssssssesssessessesssssssseess 188 10 1 Backup plansand tasks rronin on EEEE rE E eh ene 188 10 1 1 Actions on backup plans and tasks ccccsccscsscsssesseecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsessessecsecsecsecsessecsesaesseeseeaesaeeaes 188 10 1 2 States and statuses of backup plans and tasks ccccccccsccsscssscssecsecessessecseeesecssecsesesecsseceeseseeeseeeseeseees 190 10 1 3 Export and import of backup plans ccccccccsccsscesscssecssecseeesecssecsecesecssecseeesecsecsesesscesecsesessessecesessees 193 10 1 4 Deploying backup plans as files cccscsccsceseeeesecsececseesecsecsecsecsecsessecsessecaecsecaecsessessecsecsesaesaesaesaeeaes 196 101 5 Backup plan detailse ne ya
205. ew for vaults p 99 Select data from a vault by browsing either the archives and backups in the Archive view or the backed up data in the Data view Alert notifications p 200 A new alert system has been introduced for both local and centralized management Select the alerts you want to observe Set up e mail notifications about various types of alerts UEFI GPT support p 114 Full support for UEFl based systems and GPT disks Recovery of BIOS based systems to UEFI based systems and vice versa 4 KB drives support p 108 When recovering disks or volumes the software automatically eliminates volume misalignment a situation that occurs when volume clusters are not aligned with disk sectors Partition volume alignment p 108 Solid State Drives SSD require a specific partition alignment for optimal performance The required alignment is set automatically during recovery but you can change it manually if required Automatic disk volume mapping p 105 When recovering disks or volumes the software automatically maps the selected disk volumes to the target disks in the optimal manner Hardware snapshot provider support p 95 The Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS can use hardware based providers for taking snapshots Applying Acronis Universal Restore without recovery p 112 Using bootable media you can apply Acronis Universal Restore to an operating system without performing the recovery
206. ew value will be used by default in all backup plans you will create later on this machine To view and change the default backup options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options from the top menu Availability of the backup options The set of available backup options depends on The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media The type of the data being backed up disk file The backup destination networked location or local disk The backup scheme manual start or using the scheduler The following table summarizes the availability of the backup options Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Additional settings p 77 Ask for the first media while Dest Dest Dest Dest backing up to removable removable removable removable removable media media media media media Use FTP in Active mode Dest FTP Dest FTP Dest FTP Dest FTP server server server server Reset archive bit Restart the machine automatically after backup is finished Archive protection p 78 password encryption Backup cataloging p 79 Backup performance Backup priority p 80 HDD writing speed p 80 Network connection speed p 80 Backup splitting p 81 Compression level p 82 Disaster recovery plan p 82 Error handling p 83 Do n
207. ew virtual machine on the respective virtualization server You might need to prepare target disks before recovery Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to create or delete volumes change a disk partitioning style create a disk group and perform other disk management operations on the target hardware both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director LV see Disk management p 172 5 1 Creating a recovery task To create a recovery task perform the following steps What to recover Select data p 99 Select data to recover Access credentials p 102 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location if the task account does not have the right to access it To access this option click Show access credentials Where to recover This section appears after the required backup is selected and the type of data to recover is defined The parameters you specify here depend on the type of data being recovered Disks p 103 Volumes p 105 Files p 109 Acronis Active Restore Optional The Acronis Active Restore check box is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Acronis Active Restore brings a system online immediately after the recovery is started The operating system boots from the backup image and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incom
208. ey are recovered or from the disk if recovered to the root Alternatively you can disable recovery p 130 of the security settings even if they are available in the archive The result will be the same the files will inherit the permissions from the parent folder To access file or folder NTFS permissions select Properties gt Security 4 7 13 Media components This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the backup destination is removable media When backing up to removable media you can make this media work as regular Linux based bootable media p 229 by writing additional components to it As a result you will not need a separate rescue disc The preset is No bootable components Choose one of the following components you want to put on the bootable media Acronis Bootable Agent is a bootable rescue utility based on Linux kernel that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 agent Put this component on the media if you want more functionality during recovery You will be able to configure the recovery operation in the same way as under regular bootable media use Active Restore or Universal Restore If the media is being created in Windows the disk management functionality will also be available Acronis Bootable Agent and One Click Restore The One Click Restore is the minimal addition to a disk backup stored on removable media allowing for ea
209. f mnt system boot grub grub conf backup Edit the mnt system boot grub menu Ist file for Debian Ubuntu and SUSE Linux distributions or the mnt system boot grub grub conf file for Fedora and Red Hat Enterprise Linux distributions for example as follows vi mnt system boot grub menu 1st In the menu Ist file respectively grub conf find the menu item that corresponds to the system you are recovering This menu items have the following form title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 24 4 root hd kernel vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 ro root dev sda2 rhgb quiet initrd initrd 2 6 24 4 img The lines starting with title root kernel and initrd respectively determine The title of the menu item The device on which the Linux kernel is located typically this is the boot partition or the root partition such as root hd0 0 in this example The path to the kernel on that device and the root partition in this example the path is vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 and the root partition is dev sda2 You can specify the root partition by label such as root LABEL identifier in the form root UUID some_uuid or device name such as root dev sda2 The path to the initrd service on that device Edit the file mnt system etc fstab to correct the names of any devices that have changed as a result of the recovery Start the GRUB shell by running one of the following commands chroot mnt system sbin grub or chroot mnt system usr
210. f Acronis Disk Director Lite the user has the possibility to recreate the necessary disk configuration so that the volume image can be recovered exactly as it was or with any alteration of the disk or volume structure the user might consider necessary All operations on disks and volumes involve a certain risk of data damage Operations on system bootable or data volumes must be carried out very carefully to avoid potential problems with the booting process or hard disk data storage Operations with hard disks and volumes take a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in volume damage and data loss All operations on volumes of dynamic disks in Windows XP and Windows 2000 require Acronis Managed Machine Service to be run under an account with administrator s rights Please take all necessary precautions p 172 to avoid possible data loss 9 1 Supported file systems Acronis Disk Director Lite supports the following file systems FAT 16 32 NTFS If it is necessary to perform an operation on a volume with a different file system use the full version of Acronis Disk Director It provides more tools and utilities to manage disks and volumes with the following file systems FAT 16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 m HFS HFSX ReiserFS JFS Linux SWAP 9 2 Basic precautions To avoid any
211. fies the days on which to perform a backup The default value is Workdays Weekly Monthly Specifies which of the days selected in the Back up on field you want to reserve for weekly and monthly backups A monthly backup will be performed every fourth such day The default value is Friday Keep backups Specifies how long you want the backups to be stored in the archive A term can be set in hours days weeks months or years For monthly backups you can also select Keep indefinitely if you want them to be saved forever The default values for each backup type are as follows Daily 5 days recommended minimum Weekly 7 weeks Monthly indefinitely The retention period for weekly backups must exceed that for daily backups the monthly backups retention period must be greater than the weekly backups retention period We recommend setting a retention period of at least one week for daily backups Backup type Specifies the types of daily weekly and monthly backups Always full all the daily weekly and monthly backups will be always full This is the default selection for cases when a tape drive is selected as a backup location Full Differential Incremental daily backups are incremental weekly backups are differential and monthly backups are full Advanced settings Available only for advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 when creating a centralized backup plan See the Advanced scheduling settings section
212. folder 11 1 7 2 Why would I use Large Scale Recovery In the event of a disaster or the need to recover large volumes of data or the entire machines quickly this service helps you save time and network traffic Recovering hundreds of gigabytes over the Internet may take days This process will deliver a faster recovery 11 1 7 3 Do I need to perform initial seeding to be able to use Large Scale Recovery No these services are independent 11 1 7 4 Is Large Scale Recovery a paid service Yes you need to buy one Large Scale Recovery license per machine The license enables you to get a disk with all of the currently available backups of this machine To obtain backups that will be created in the future you will need a new Large Scale Recovery license 11 1 7 5 Can I perform large scale recovery on a different machine Yes You can recover the data an unlimited number of times on any machine you wish Acronis Universal Restore is included to help you recover an operating system to dissimilar hardware 11 1 7 6 Can I obtain backups taken from a number of machines on a single hard drive No A separate hard drive is required for each machine 11 1 7 7 How to buy a Large Scale Recovery license You can buy a Large Scale Recovery license from an Acronis partner or in Acronis online store Follow the link www acronis com my backup recovery online buy to locate a partner or to buy online Having purchased a license from an Acronis p
213. fy an event or multiple events The task will be launched as soon as any of the events occurs The table below lists the events available under Windows operating systems Event Time Daily Weekly Monthly Time passed since the last successful backup has completed specify the length of time User logon any user current user specify the user s account User logoff any user current user specify the user s account Shutting down is not the same as logging off The task will not run at a system shutdown System startup Free space change specify the amount of free space change on any volume selected for backup or containing data selected for backup An event in Windows event log specify the parameters of the event Upon an Acronis Drive Monitor alert Condition For backup operations only you can specify a condition or multiple conditions in addition to the events Once any of the events occurs the scheduler checks the condition and runs the task if the condition is met With multiple conditions all of them must be met simultaneously to enable task execution The table below lists the conditions available under Windows operating systems Condition run the task only if User is idle a screen saver is running or the machine is locked Location s host is available The task run time is within the specified time interval All users are logged off The specified period of time has passed since the last successf
214. g on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 User name enter the user name Password enter the password d Click OK 11 Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct 4 7 16 2 Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems on the sending machine and only for Windows on the receiving machine This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 Inthe Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows When backup completes successfully to
215. g the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 p 166 section If you do not have a machine with WAIK prepare as follows 1 Download and install Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista PE 2 0 http www microsoft com Downloads details aspx familyid C7 D4BC6D 15F3 4284 9123 67983 OD629F2 amp displaylang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilylID 94bb6e34 d890 4932 81a5 5b50c 657de08 amp DisplayLang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows 7 PE 3 0 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 696DD665 9F 76 4177 A811 39C26 D3B3B34 amp displaylang en You can find system requirements for installation by following the above links optional Burn the WAIK to DVD or copy to a flash drive Install the Microsoft NET Framework v 2 0 from this kit NETFXx86 or NETFXx64 depending on your hardware 4 Install Microsoft Core XML MSXML 5 0 or 6 0 Parser from this kit 5 Install Windows AIK from this kit 6 Install Bootable Media Builder on the same machine It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the help documentation supplied with Windows AIK To access the documentation select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Documentation from the start menu Using Bart PE You can create a Bart PE image with Acronis Plug in using the Bart PE Builder
216. hanges made to the machine while it was powered on will be overwritten 4 6 2 Selecting a machine that will perform conversion Take into account the following considerations Which agent is installed on the machine The resulting virtual machine type and location depend on the agent that resides on the selected machine Agent for ESX i is installed on the machine If the agent manages more than one ESX i host you can choose the host where the virtual machine will be created This selection is done in the VM type p 122 step In the Storage step you can select the storage where the virtual machine will be created Virtual machines created as a result of backup cannot be added to a backup plan On the management server they appear as unmanageable or do not appear at all if integration with vCenter Server is not enabled Agent for Hyper V is installed on the machine You can choose between creating a virtual machine on the Hyper V server and creating a VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation machine This selection is done in the VM type p 122 step In the Storage step you can select the virtual machine path Virtual machines created on the server as a result of backup do not appear on the management server because such machines are not supposed to be backed up Agent for Windows is installed on the machine You can choose the virtual machine type VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC
217. hat have already been cataloged will not be cataloged again Since cataloging a large number of backed up data may take a long time you may prefer to use the Archive view of the respective vault For more information about using the Archive view see Browsing the vault contents and data selection in the Working with vaults p 136 section The data is not supported by the catalog The following data cannot be displayed in the catalog or data view Data from the encrypted and password protected archives Data backed up to removable media such as CD DVD BD lomega REV Data backed up to Acronis Online Backup Storage Data backed up using Acronis True Image Echo or earlier product versions Data backed up using the simplified backup naming Solution To be able to browse such data use the Archive view tab of the respective vault The data is not included in the centralized catalog Data from personal vaults p 136 is not displayed in the centralized catalog Solution To be able to browse such data connect directly to a machine select the required personal vault and then select Data view 5 1 2 Access credentials for location Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters sec
218. he machine system that means that no programs can be installed on it and you will not be able to store any files there Acronis Disk Director Lite will detect that the disk is unusable by the system and needs to be initialized The Disk management view will show the newly detected hardware as a gray block witha grayed icon thus indicating that the disk is unusable by the system If you need to initialize a disk 1 Select a disk to initialize 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Initialize in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Disk Initialization window that will provide the basic hardware details such as the disk s number capacity and state to aid you in the choice of your possible action 3 Inthe window you will be able to set the disk partitioning scheme MBR or GPT and the disk type basic or dynamic The new disk state will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 4 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of the disk initialization To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them After the initialization all the disk space remains unallocated and so still impossible to be used for program installation or file storage To be able to use it proceed normally to the Create volume operation If you decide to change the disk settings it c
219. he option the system recovery will proceed in the usual way and the machine will become operational after the recovery is completed If you enable the option the sequence of actions will be set as follows Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Because serving requests is performed simultaneously with recovery the system operation can slow down even if recovery priority in the recovery options is set to Low This way the system downtime is reduced to a minimum at the cost of a temporary performance downgrade Usage scenarios 1 The system uptime is one of the efficiency criteria Examples Client oriented online services Web retailers polling stations 2 The system storage space ratio is heavily biased toward storage Some machines are being used as storage facilities where the operating system claims a small space segment and all other disk space is committed to storage such as movies sounds or other multimedia files Some of these storage volumes can be extremely large as compared to the system and so practically all the recovery time will be dedicated to recovering the files which might be used much later on if in any near future at all If you opt for Acronis Active Restore the system
220. hile one drive is attached to the machine you can keep the other drive off site for extra data protection 4 3 1 5 Example 5 Daily backups with weekly drive swaps Consider the following scenario You want to perform daily backups of your machine a full backup each Monday and incremental backups on Tuesday through Sunday You want to back up to the archive MyMachine on an external hard disk drive You have two such drives Either of them has drive letter D in the operating system when attached to the machine You want to swap the drives each Monday so that one drive contains backups of the current week Monday through Sunday and the other drive those of the previous week In this scenario you need to create two backup plans as follows a b When creating the first backup plan specify MyMachine as the archive name and D as the archive location select the Name backup files using the archive name check box select Full as the backup type and schedule the backups to run every week on Monday When creating the second backup plan specify the same settings as in the first backup plan but select Incremental as the backup type and schedule the backups to run every week on Tuesday through Sunday Result Before creating a Monday backup by the first backup plan all backups will be deleted from the currently attached drive While one drive is attached to the machine you can keep the other drive off site for extra da
221. hine becomes registered as a result of the registration p 238 procedure Registration A procedure that adds a managed machine p 237 to a management server p 237 Registration sets up a trust relationship between the agent p 228 residing on the machine and the server During registration the console retrieves the management server s client certificate and passes it to the agent which uses it later to authenticate clients attempting to connect This helps prevent any attempts by network attackers from establishing a fake connection on behalf of a trusted principal the management server Replenishable pool A tape pool that is allowed to take tapes from the Free tapes pool when required Replication Copying a backup p 228 to another location By default the backup is copied immediately after creation A user has the option to postpone copying the backup by setting up replication inactivity time This feature replaces and enhances the dual destination backup feature which was available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Retention rules A part of backup plan p 229 that specifies when and how to delete or move the backups p 228 created by the plan S Static group A group of machines which a management server p 237 administrator populates by manually adding machines to the group A machine remains in a static group until the administrator removes it from the group or from the management server Storag
222. hstiideate ists hteatih tah atleast iledetieds 86 ALPAA NIGUMTE POU ese ccesesas esate cedes csiece E eda pa dabadavaq veda E fas bedetasayetapaneye 87 47 15 M ltivolume snapshot irrisica Aaaa 88 47 16 Notifications ney e e E N E EA E A A AAAA EA 88 A17 Pre PostecommaNdS Ssni n a A N AARAA he aa I Ne oe aa 90 4 7 18 Pre Post data capture commands ii s00iscc ised ee nereeeetateueadeeeeie hdd ee iva iai tiated ees 91 4 7 19 Replication cleanup inactivity time c ccccceessecessescsssseessseeessesecssssesessesessesesseceesessesesseeesseeessesasensatees 93 4 7 20 Sector by sector DaCKUP csccscsscsscescsscescsssssessessssseeseeseesessessecsecsecsessecsesecsecsecaeesecsecsesaesaesaesaesaesaesaesas 93 47 21 Task Failte handling Hins slic suadtsced casi sieges sand a sted easisesd a a a aaa 94 4 7 22 Task start CONCITIONS sssrinin secede sdneudecdan deduct dest suceda ceenchdecadhdhcesa lash useate 94 4 7 23 Volume Shadow Copy Service csccscsscsscsscsscsscsscsseesessesseeseesecsessecsessesseesecsecsesaeesecseesecseeseesesaesaesaesaesas 95 REGCOVECLY E A ON A AN RN E 97 51 Creating a recovery taskon ccs oo 2s Pe Ae oe a ORE ANSE One a era re TaT 97 SLE Wh at to TE COVER i ccscecevcecvccexesccas iniaa ninii 99 5 1 2 Access Credentials for location edutuid ettita eiii aA e AAA e a 102 5 1 3 Access credentials fordestination siiin ararat a a denies a aiaiai aa piye 103 5 1 4 Where t TetoVer iiri ii i 103 SPS Whenito O
223. ht of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 7 3 2 Backup selection To select a backup 1 Select one of the backups by its creation date time 2 To assist you with choosing the right backup the bottom table displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then click Information 3 Click OK 7 3 3 Access credentials To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the current user account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to F
224. ial backups that depend on it the deletion is postponed until all the dependent backups can be deleted as well For more information see Retention rules p 69 4 2 5 5 Tower of Hanoi scheme Ata glance Up to 16 levels of full differential and incremental backups Next level backups are twice as rare as previous level backups One backup of each level is stored at a time Higher density of more recent backups Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Tower of Hanoi scheme Schedule Set up a daily p 54 weekly p 56 or monthly p 58 schedule Setting up schedule parameters allows for the creation of simple schedules example of a simple daily schedule a backup task will be run every 1 day at 10 AM as well as more complex schedules example of a complex daily schedule a task will be run every 3 days starting from January 15 During the specified days the task will be repeated every 2 hours from 10 AM to 10 PM Thus complex schedules specify the sessions on which the scheme should run In the discussion below days can be replaced with scheduled sessions Number of levels Select from 2 to 16 backup levels See the example stated below for details Roll back period The guaranteed number of sessions that one can go back in the archive at any time Calculated automatically depending on the schedule parameters and the numbers of levels you select See the example below for details Backup type Spec
225. iate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the backup task if the Selected Cleared Selected Cleared command execution fails Do not perform the data Selected Selected Cleared Cleared capture until the command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the data N A Perform the data capture after the capture concurrently Perform the data command is with the command capture only after the i executed despite and irrespective of command is execution failure the command successfully executed or success execution result Fail the task if the command execution fails A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 4 7 18 2 Post data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed after data capture 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed In the Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cl
226. ication p 238 validation p 239 conversion to a virtual machine the backup options p 228 For example a backup plan can contain the following information back up volume C this is the data the plan will protect name the archive MySystemVolume and place it in server backups this is the backup archive name and location perform a full backup monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and an incremental backup on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months this is a backup scheme validate the last backup immediately after its creation this is a validation rule protect the archive with a password this is an option Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks p 239 executed on a managed machine p 237 A backup plan can be created directly on the machine imported from another machine local plan or propagated to the machine from the management server centralized plan p 230 Backup scheme A part of the backup plan p 229 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules and the cleanup p 231 schedule For example perform a full backup p 235 monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and an incremental backup p 236 on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months Check for such backups every time the backup operation is completed Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the ability to use well known optimiz
227. ici ii iiini i 223 11 6 Limitations of the Online storage s sssesusssssssrernersssssrrrrrersssssrrrrrensssssnerrernsssssneeeeeesssns 224 11 7 Terminology reference ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 224 127 GIOSS ANY eE ascusciecasvessecsdecsdecacecscecacecececasccasccasdcacccacccasccacdeacccacdcacecacuccdess 227 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 1 1 What s new in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 builds on the success that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 has established by bringing enterprise class capabilities to the small business market at an affordable price in an easy to use package Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 continues the trend of expanding the backup and recovery capabilities in physical virtual and cloud environments The following is a summary of the product s new features and enhancements Simplified installation The new installer makes the installation procedure simple and clear Improved usability The redesigned product s UI lets you perform any operation easier faster and more intuitively Advanced replication and retention of backups p 66 Store a backup in multiple locations possibly off site for redundancy Move or copy backups to a cheaper or off site storage automatically Set a replication time window if you do not want copying or moving to occur during business hours Data vi
228. ified destina Log view Common way of working with views Generally every view contains a table of items a table toolbar with buttons and the Information panel Use filtering and sorting p 16 capabilities to search the table for the item in question Inthe table select the desired item In the information panel collapsed by default view the item s details To expand the panel click the arrow mark Perform actions on the selected item There are several ways of performing the same action on selected items By clicking the buttons on the table toolbar By selecting the items in the Actions menu By right clicking the item and selecting the operation in the context menu y rig g g p Sorting filtering and configuring table items The following is a guideline to sort filter and configure table items in any view To Do the following Sort items by any column Click a column s header to sort items in ascending order Click it once again to sort items in descending order Filter items by predefined column value Filter items by entered value Filter items by a predefined parameters Show or hide table columns 2 1 2 2 In a field below the corresponding column s header select the required value from the drop down list In a field below the corresponding column s header type a value As a result you will see the list of values fully or just partly coincide with the entered
229. ifies what backup types the backup levels will have Always full all levels of backups will be full This is the default selection for cases when a tape drive is selected as a backup location Full Differential Incremental backups of different levels will have different types Last level backups are full Backups of intermediate levels are differential First level backups are incremental Example Schedule parameters are set as follows Recur Every 1 day Frequency Once at 6 PM Number of levels 4 Backup type Full Differential Incremental This is how the first 14 days or 14 sessions of this scheme s schedule look Shaded numbers denote backup levels ESEJEJRJESKA SAEZ EIEE E E E H Backups of different levels have different types Last level in this case level 4 backups are full Backups of intermediate levels 2 3 are differential First level 1 backups are incremental A cleanup mechanism ensures that only the most recent backups of each level are kept Here is how the archive looks on day 8 a day before creating a new full backup The scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the current time Having four backups we could recover data as of today yesterday half a week or a week ago Roll back period The number of days we can go back in the archive is different on different days The minimum number of days we are guaranteed to have is called the ro
230. ight click on the selected volume and then click Change label 2 Enter anew label in the Change label window text field 3 By clicking OK in the Change label window you ll add the pending operation of changing the volume label If when setting a new volume label you use characters that are unsupported by the currently installed operating system you will get the appropriate warning and the OK button will be disabled You will have to use only supported characters to proceed with changing the volume label To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new label will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 9 7 6 Format volume You might want to format a volume if you want to change its file system to save additional space which is being lost due to the cluster size on the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems as a quick and more or less reliable way of destroying data residing in this volume If you want to format a volume 1 Select a volume to format 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Format in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Format Volume window where you will be able to set the new file system options You can choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the Volume
231. ile processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Event tracing Windows events log p 130 SNMP p 129 File level security p 130 Recover files with their security settings Mount points p 130 Notifications E mail p 131 Win Pop up p 132 Pre Post recovery commands p 132 Recovery priority p 134 Agent for Windows Disk recovery Windows recovery File recovery also from a disk backup Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk recovery Windows recovery PE only File recovery also from a disk backup PE only 5 7 1 Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the recovery operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Validate backup archive before recovery The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to validate a backup to ensure that the backup is not corrupted before data is recovered from it Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers Restart machine automatically if it is required for recovery This option is effective when recovery takes place on a machine running an operating system The preset is Disabled The option defines whether to reboot the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Such might be the case when a volume locked by the operating system has to be recovere
232. ill be cleaned up using consolidation p 231 which is a more time consuming and resource intensive operation 4 2 5 2 Run now scheme With the Run now scheme the backup will be performed immediately right after you click the OK button at the bottom of the Create Backup Plan page In the Backup type field select whether you want to create a full incremental or differential backup p 22 4 2 5 3 Grandfather Father Son scheme At a glance Daily Son incremental weekly Father differential and monthly Grandfather backups Custom day for weekly and monthly backups Custom retention periods for backups of each type Description Let us suppose that we want to set up a backup plan that will regularly produce a series of daily D weekly W and monthly M backups Here is a natural way to do this the following table shows a sample two month period for such a plan pf mo tu we oth r fan Jan 8 Jan 14 ora sma amas Jan 29 Feb 4 2 Feb 5 Feb 11 2 Feb 12 Feb 18 2 Feb 19 Feb 25 EA Feb 26 Mar 4 2 Daily backups run every workday except Friday which is left for weekly and monthly backups Monthly backups run every fourth Friday and weekly backups run on all other Fridays Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Start backup at Specifies when to start a backup The default value is 12 00 PM Back up on Speci
233. ill be inactive If the volume is intended for data storage select Logical A Basic disk can contain up to four primary volumes If they already exist the disk will have to be converted into dynamic otherwise or Active and Primary options will be disabled and you will only be able to select the Logical volume type The warning message will advise you that an OS installed on this volume will not be bootable If you use characters when setting a new volume label that are unsupported by the currently installed operation system you will get the appropriate warning and the Next button will be disabled You will have to change the label to proceed with the creation of the new volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Set the volume size p 183 If you click the Finish button you will complete the operation planning To perform the planned operation click Commit in the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or on 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 9 7 2 Delete volume This version of Acronis Disk Director Lite has reduced functionality because it is mainly a tool for preparing bare metal systems for recovering previously saved volume images The features of resizing the existing volumes and creating the new volumes using
234. ime Backup files created by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 have a TIB extension The TIB files which are the result of a backup export p 235 or consolidation p 231 are also called backups Backup archive Archive A set of backups p 228 created and managed by a backup plan p 229 An archive can contain multiple full backups p 235 as well as incremental p 236 and differential backups p 232 Backups belonging to the same archive are always stored in the same location If the backup plan includes replication p 238 or moving of backups to multiple locations the backups in each location form a separate archive Backup operation An operation that creates a copy of the data that exists on a machine s p 236 hard disk for the purpose of recovering or reverting the data to a specified date and time Backup options Configuration parameters of a backup operation p 228 such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allotted for the backup stream or data compression level Backup options are a part of a backup plan p 229 Backup plan Plan A set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine A backup plan specifies what data to back up the backup archive p 228 name and location the backup scheme p 229 This includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules p 238 optionally additional operations to perform with the backups repl
235. indows XP Professional SP2 x86 x64 Windows Vista all editions except for Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium x86 x64 Windows 7 all editions except for the Starter and Home editions x86 x64 If your backups are likely to exceed the storage quota for this type of subscription you may want to use a subscription with larger storage quota For example you can use a server subscription on a workstation The inverse usage is not possible You cannot back up a server using a workstation subscription Trial subscriptions You can get one free workstation or server subscription per account The storage quota of the trial subscription is equal to that of the standard subscription The subscription period is limited to 2 months Obtaining a trial subscription is possible until you buy a paid subscription You can use a trial subscription along with paid ones The same expiration rules apply to trial and paid subscriptions To continue using the service after the trial subscription expires buy the same type subscription and renew the trial subscription specifying the paid subscription Your backed up data will be kept online Regular backups of your machines will continue uninterrupted The service will not need to perform a new full backup To get a trial subscription do either of the following Go to the account management Web page click Try Now Free for 60 Days and select the necessary subscription type Install Acro
236. ing SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 please see Support for SNMP p 28 The preset is Disabled To set up sending SNMP messages 1 Select the Send messages to SNMP server check box 2 Specify the appropriate options as follows Types of events to send choose the types of events All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct To disable sending SNMP messages clear the Send messages to SNMP server check box The messages are sent over UDP The next section contains additional information about Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine p 205 10 5 4 2 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine Windows To install the SNMP service on a machine running Windows 1 Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs gt Add Remove Windows Components 2 Select Management and Monitoring Tools 3 Click Details 4 Select the Simple Network Management Protocol check box 5 Click OK You might be asked for Immib2 dll that can be found on the installation disc of your operating system Linux To receive SNMP messages on
237. ing on the item selected in the Navigation tree and the main area 2 1 1 Navigation pane The navigation pane includes the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar Navigation tree The Navigation tree enables you to navigate across the program views You can choose between the Full list or the Short list of views The Short list contains the most frequently used views from the Full list The Short list displays m 23 Machine name This is the root of the tree also called a Welcome screen It displays the name of the machine the console is currently connected to Use this view for quick access to the main operations available on the managed machine Backup plans and tasks Use this view to manage backup plans and tasks on the managed machine run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their progress amp Vaults Use this view to manage personal vaults and archives stored in there add new vaults rename and delete the existing ones validate vaults explore backup content perform operations on archives and backups etc If the machine is registered on the management server you can browse the centralized vaults and perform operations on the archives for which you have the appropriate permissions m F Alerts Use this view to examine warning messages for the managed machine The Full list additionally displays gt Disk management Use this view to perform operations on the machine s hard disk drives _ Log Use thi
238. ing requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background For details see Acronis Active Restore p 118 Access credentials p 103 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not enable recovery of the selected data To access this setting click Show access credentials When to recover Recover p 110 Select when to start recovery The task can start immediately after its creation be scheduled for a specified date and time in the future or simply saved for manual execution Task parameters Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the recovery task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Recovery options Optional Customize the recovery operation by configuring the recovery options such as pre post recovery commands recovery priority error handling or notification options If you do nothing in this section the default values p 126 will be used After any of the settings are changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears Therefore in this section you always see only the settings that differ from the default values Clicking Reset to default resets all the set
239. ings have not been pre configured the agent uses DHCP auto configuration You also have the ability to configure the network settings manually when the bootable agent is running on the machine Pre configuring multiple network connections You can pre configure TCP IP settings for up to ten network interface cards To ensure that each NIC will be assigned the appropriate settings create the media on the server for which the media is customized When you select an existing NIC in the wizard window its settings are selected for saving on the media The MAC address of each existing NIC is also saved on the media You can change the settings except for the MAC address or configure the settings for a non existent NIC if need be Once the bootable agent starts on the server it retrieves the list of available NICs This list is sorted by the slots the NICs occupy the closest to the processor on top The bootable agent assigns each known NIC the appropriate settings identifying the NICs by their MAC addresses After the NICs with known MAC addresses are configured the remaining NICs are assigned the settings that you have made for non existent NICs starting from the upper non assigned NIC You can customize bootable media for any machine and not only for the machine where the media is created To do so configure the NICs according to their slot order on that machine NIC1 occupies the slot closest to the processor NIC2 is in the next slot
240. init insmod iscsiadm kill kpartx In 1s lspci lvm mdadm mkdir mke2fs mknod mkswap more mount mtx mv pecardctl ping pktsetup poweroff ps raidautorun readcd reboot rm rmmod route scp scsi_id sed sg _map26 sh sleep ssh sshd strace swapoff swapon sysinfo tar tune2fs udev udevinfo udevstart umount uuidgen vconfig vi zcat 8 5 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is a modification of the bootable agent p 229 residing on the system disk in Windows or on the boot partition in Linux and configured to start at boot time on pressing F11 It eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs reboot the machine wait for the prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager to appear and hit F11 The program will start and you can perform recovery You can also back up using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager while on the move On machines with the GRUB boot loader installed you select the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the boot menu instead of pressing F11 Activate Activation enables the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager if you do not have the GRUB boot loader or adds the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager item to GRUB s menu if you have GRUB The system disk or
241. ion of data and select it for recovery On a managed machine the data catalog functionality is available through the Data view tab for any vault accessible from this machine On the management server the catalog functionality is available through both Data view and the centralized Data catalog The centralized data catalog displays in a single place all the data stored in the centralized managed vaults Selecting the backed up data for recovery 1 Do any of the following To access the Data view tab connect the console to a machine or to the management server navigate to Vaults view and click the required vault To access the Data catalog connect the console to the management server and select Data catalog in the Navigation tree 2 Inthe Show field select the type of data to display Select Machines disks volumes to browse and search for entire disks and volumes in disk level backups Select Folders files to browse and search for files and folders in both file level and disk level backups 3 Inthe Display data backed up for field specify the time period for which the backed up data will be displayed 4 Do any of the following Select the data to recover in the catalog tree or in the table to the right of the catalog tree Inthe search string type the information that helps to identify the required data items this can be a machine name a file or folder name or a disk label and then click Search You can use
242. ion or movement with the next dependent backup For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup but to retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup date When an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain is deleted the resulting backup type will be incremental This mode ensures that after each cleanup the archive size and the age or number of backups are within the bounds you specify The consolidation however may take a lot of time and system resources You still need some extra space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation What you need to know about consolidation Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup 4 5 5 Replication cleanup inactivity time This option is effective only if you set up replication or retention rules p 66 for the backups This option defines a time period when starting replication or applying retention rules is not allowed The operations will be performed when the inactivity time ends if the machine is powered on at that moment The operations that had started before the inactivity time began continue without interruption The inactivity time affects all l
243. iption 2 using Machine 2 After reassigning Delete backups from Subscription 1 using Machine 2 You cannot delete backups from Subscription 2 unless you assign this subscription to any machine 11 5 Configuring proxy settings If the machine connects to the Internet through a proxy server configure Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 to use the proxy server 1 Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 2 On the toolbar on the Options menu click Machine options 3 Click Online backup proxy 4 Enter the proxy server settings For detailed information about the settings please refer to the context sensitive help 11 6 Limitations of the online storage Unlike other types of storage available in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 the online storage has the following limitations Operations The following operations are not possible Backup operations Backing up from bootable media Backing up under Linux Creating differential backups Using the Grandfather Father Son GFS Tower of Hanoi and Custom backup schemes Simplified naming of backup files Converting a backup to a virtual machine Recovery operation Recovering a backup as a virtual machine Operations with backups Exporting a backup Mounting a backup Copying or moving backups to the online storage Operation with archives an archive is a set of backups Exporting an archive These limitations also apply to backing up data using Initial
244. ive In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify ServerFiles Date as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box specify Differential as the backup type and schedule the backups to run every hour from midnight Result The 24 backups of January 1 2011 will be stored as ServerFiles 1 1 2011 tib ServerFiles 1 1 2011 2 tib and so on up to ServerFiles 1 1 2011 24 tib The following day the backups will start with the full backup ServerFiles 1 2 2011 tib See also The Date variable p 52 4 3 1 4 Example 4 Daily full backups with daily drive swaps Consider the following scenario You want to perform daily full backups of your machine to the file MyMachine tib on an external hard disk drive You have two such drives Either of them has the drive letter D when attached to the machine You want to swap the drives before each backup so that one drive contains today s backup and the other drive yesterday s backup You want each new backup to replace the backup on the currently attached drive In this scenario create a backup plan with a daily schedule When creating the backup plan specify MyMachine as the archive name and D as the archive location select the Name backup files using the archive name check box and select Full as the backup type Result Each hard disk drive will contain one full backup W
245. ive bit value When performing incremental or differential backup it determines whether a file has changed by the file size and the date time when the file was last saved Restart the machine automatically after backup is finished This option is available only when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled When the option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will restart the machine after the backup process is completed For example if the machine boots from a hard disk drive by default and you select this check box the machine will be restarted and the operating system will start as soon as the bootable agent has finished creating the backup Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers 4 7 2 Archive protection This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for both disk level and file level backup This option defines whether the archive will be protected with a password and whether the archive s content will be encrypted This option is not available when the archive already contains backups For example this option may not be available When you specify an already existing archive as the destination of the backup plan When you edit a backup plan that has already resulted in a backup The preset is Disabled To
246. ize 4 7 6 Compression level This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines the level of compression applied to the data being backed up The preset is Normal The optimal data compression level depends on the type of data being backed up For example even maximum compression will not significantly reduce the archive size if the archive contains essentially compressed files such as jpg pdf or mp3 However formats such as doc or xls will be compressed well To specify the compression level Select one of the following None the data will be copied as is without any compression The resulting backup size will be maximal Normal recommended in most cases High the resulting backup size will typically be less than for the Normal level Maximum the data will be compressed as much as possible The backup duration will be maximal You may want to select maximum compression when backing up to removable media to reduce the number of blank disks required 4 7 7 Disaster recovery plan DRP This option is effective for Windows and Linux but is not applicable to bootable media Disaster recovery plan DRP contains a list of backed up data items and detailed instructions that guide a user through a process of recovering these items from a backup If the Disaster recovery plan DRP option is enabled a DRP is created and sent by e mail to the specified list of us
247. k is converted from GPT to MBR E g if such conversion will stop a disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or some volumes on the selected GPT disk will not be accessible with MBR e g volumes located more than 2 TB from the beginning of the disk you will be warned here about such damage Please note a volume belonging to a GPT disk to convert will be a logical one after the operation and is irreversible 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of GPT to MBR disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 9 6 5 Disk conversion basic to dynamic You would want to convert a basic disk to dynamic in the following cases If you plan to use the disk as part of a dynamic disk group If you want to achieve additional disk reliability for data storage If you need to convert a basic disk to dynamic 1 Select the basic disk to convert to dynamic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to dynamic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the basic disk being converted to dynamic 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately and if necessary your machine will be restarted Please note A dynamic disk occupies the last megabyte of the physical disk t
248. k the name of an event whose properties you want to view 3 Inthe Event Properties dialog box view the event s properties such as the event source shown in the Source field and the event number shown in the Event ID field When you are finished click OK to close the Event Properties dialog box 4 4 5 Upon an Acronis Drive Monitor alert This schedule is effective in Windows operating systems when Acronis Drive Monitor is installed Acronis Drive Monitor reports on hard disk health by using the hard disk s internal monitoring system S M A R T Based on alerts from Acronis Drive Monitor you can set up emergency backups of your data in addition to regular backups The emergency backup will start when a hard disk with your data is about to fail The backup starts as soon as disk health reaches a warning level or a critical level You can see the disk health indicator as a percentage for each disk by opening Acronis Drive Monitor Alerts about disk temperature do not start the backup Tip If your backup plan uses the custom backup scheme p 39 you can set up this emergency backup simply by adding an extra schedule to the same backup plan When using a different backup scheme you will need to create a separate backup plan 4 4 6 Conditions Conditions add more flexibility to the scheduler enabling to execute backup tasks with respect to certain conditions Once a specified event occurs see the Scheduling p 53
249. kups can occupy no more than 250 GB 11 1 2 What data can I back up and recover You can back up any files volumes or the entire physical machine as often as you wish Unlike most online backup solutions Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online enables bare metal recovery directly from the online storage Files can be recovered from disk level backups as well as from file level backups 11 1 3 How long will my backups be kept in the online storage Your backups remain in the online storage until you delete them or until the subscription expires Recovering data from the online storage is possible for 30 days following the subscription expiration date For effective use of the storage space you have the option to set up the Delete backups older than retention rule Example You might want to use the following backup strategy for a file server Back up the critical files twice a day on a schedule Set the retention rule Delete backups older than 7 days This means that after every backup the software will check for backups older than 7 days and delete them automatically Run backup of the server s system volume manually as required For example after the operating system updates Manually delete the backups that you do not need 11 1 4 How to secure my data Backups can be encrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES cryptographic algorithm and the password you set This guarantees that your data is not accessed by anyone
250. l To find out more about Acronis Disk Director Lite see the Disk management p 172 section 3 6 Compatibility with encryption software Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 fully retains its functionality when interacting with file level encryption software Disk level encryption software encrypts data on the fly This is why data contained in the backup is not encrypted Disk level encryption software often modifies system areas boot records or partition tables or file system tables These factors affect disk level backup and recovery the ability of the recovered system to boot and access to Acronis Secure Zone Under some conditions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 is compatible with the following disk level encryption software Microsoft BitLocker Drive Encryption McAfee Endpoint Encryption PGP Whole Disk Encryption To ensure reliable disk level recovery follow the common rules and software specific recommendations Common installation rule The strong recommendation is to install the encryption software before installing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 The way of using Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone must not be encrypted with disk level encryption This is the only way to use Acronis Secure Zone 1 Install encryption software then install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 2 Create Acronis Secure Zone 3 Exclude Acronis Secure Zone when encrypting the disk or its volumes Common backup rule You ca
251. l backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup p 235 You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup Direct management An operation that is performed on a managed machine p 237 using the direct console p 231 agent p 228 connection as opposed to centralized management p 230 when the operations are configured on the management server p 237 and propagated by the server to the managed machines The direct management operations include creating and managing local backup plans p 236 creating and managing local tasks p 236 such as recovery tasks creating and managing personal vaults p 237 and archives stored there viewing the state progress and properties of the centralized tasks p 231 existing on the machine viewing and managing the log of the agent s operations disk management operations such as clone a disk create volume convert volume A kind of direct management is performed when using bootable media p 229 Disaster recovery plan DRP An e mail message that contains a list of backed up data items and detailed instructions on how to recover these items from a backup If the corresponding backup option p 228 is enabled a DRP is sent to the specified e mail addresses after the first successful backup performed by the backup plan and also after any change to the list of data items or the DRP parameters Disk
252. l be considered as ordinary folders They will be backed up regardless of the state of the Mount points option and recovered regardless of the state of the Mount points option for recovery p 130 The preset is Disabled Tip You can back up Hyper V virtual machines residing on a cluster shared volume by backing up the required files or the entire volume with file level backup Just power off the virtual machines to be sure that they are backed up in a consistent state Example Let s assume that the C Data1 folder is a mount point for the mounted volume The volume contains folders Folder1 and Folder2 You create a backup plan for file level backup of your data If you select the check box for volume C and enable the Mount points option the C Data1 folder in your backup will contain Folder1 and Folder2 When recovering the backed up data be aware of proper using the Mount points option for recovery p 130 If you select the check box for volume C and disable the Mount points option the C Data1 folder in your backup will be empty If you select the check box for the Data1 Folder1 or Folder2 folder the checked folders will be included in the backup as ordinary folders regardless of the state of the Mount points option 4 7 15 Multi volume snapshot This option is effective only for Windows operating systems This option applies to disk level backup This option also applies to file level backup when the file level b
253. lar more than one backup tasks cannot run simultaneously on a machine A backup task and a recovery task also cannot run simultaneously if they use the same resources Once the other task unlocks the resource the waiting task enters the Running state A task may also change to the Waiting state when the event specified by the schedule occurs but the condition set in the backup plan is not met See Task start conditions p 94 for details Need interaction Any running task can put itself into the Need interaction state when it needs human interaction such as changing media or ignoring a read error The next state may be Idle if the user chooses to stop the task or Running on selecting Ignore Retry or another action such as Reboot that can put the task to the Running state 10 1 2 4 Task statuses A task can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A task status is derived from the result of the last run of the task a How it is determined How to handle Last result is Failed Identify the failed task gt Check the task log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually Edit the failed task to prevent its future failure Last result is Succeeded View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform with warning or the actions to prevent the future warnings or failure task has been st
254. le suppose that you back up machines locally during the day and replicate the backups to a network folder Make the inactivity time contain the working hours Replication will be performed after the working hours when network load is lower 4 7 20 Sector by sector backup The option is effective only for disk level backup To create an exact copy of a disk or volume on a physical level select the Back up sector by sector check box The resulting backup will be equal in size to the disk being backed up if the Compression level p 82 option is set to None Use the sector by sector backup for backing up drives with unrecognized or unsupported file systems and other proprietary data formats 4 7 21 Task failure handling This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option determines the program behavior when any of the backup plan s tasks fails The preset is not to restart a failed task The program will try to execute the failed task again if you select the Restart a failed task check box and specify the number of attempts and the time interval between the attempts The program stops trying as soon as an attempt completes successfully OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first N 3 2 attempt succeeded Failed Failed Succeded Idle Running Idle Running Idle Task state kog Interval betw
255. le or non convertible that are located on this volume If the initialization may result in bootability loss the software takes the partitioning style from the source volume ignoring the target disk size In such cases the software can select the MBR partitioning style for disks whose size is more than 2 TB however a user cannot use the space beyond 2 TB If required you can initialize the target disk manually by using the Disk management p 172 functionality The following table summarizes whether it is possible to retain the system bootability when recovering boot and system volumes of a BIOS based system to UEFI based and back The plus sign on a green background means that the system will be bootable No user action is required The plus sign on a yellow background means you need to perform additional steps to make the system bootable The minus sign on a red background means the system will not be able to boot due to BIOS and UEFI platform limitations Original Target hardware a BIOS BIOS UEFI UEFI Disk MBR Disk GPT Disk MBR Disk GPT BIOS OS Additional steps The convertible OS convertible will be automatically 1 Before recovery 4 converted to support turn off the UEFI UEFI booting mode in BIOS Perform the BIOS Solution recovery under the OS non Recover the operating bootable media Solution convertible system to an MBR disk or Recover the operating system to Aft t ff
256. letion task followed by the export task Different ways to create an export task Using the Export page is the most general way to create an export task Here you can export any backup or archive you have permission to access You can access the Export page from the Vaults view Right click the object to export archive or backup and select Export from the context menu To access the Export page first select a validation object an archive or a backup 1 Select a vault For this click the Vaults icon in the Navigation pane and select the vault expanding the vaults tree in the Vaults view or directly in the Navigation pane 2 To select an archive select a vault and then in the Vault view select the Archive view tab and click the archive name 3 Toselect a backup select an archive in the Archive view expand the archive by clicking the expand button to the left of archive name and then click the backup After selecting the validation object select Export from the context menu The Export page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select a destination and optionally provide a name for the task To export an archive or a backup perform the following steps What to export Export Select the type of objects to export Archive in this case you need to specify the archive only Backups you need to specify the archive first and then select the desired backup s in this archive
257. lick Disk Management 9 4 Choosing the operating system for disk management On a machine with two or more operating systems representation of disks and volumes depends on which operating system is currently running A volume may have a different letter in different Windows operating systems For example volume E might appear as D or L when you boot another Windows operating system installed on the same machine It is also possible that this volume will have the same letter E under any Windows OS installed on the machine A dynamic disk created in one Windows operating system is considered as a Foreign Disk in another Windows operating system or might be unsupported by this operating system When you need to perform a disk management operation on such machine it is necessary to specify for which operating system the disk layout will be displayed and the disk management operation will be performed The name of the currently selected operating system is shown on the console toolbar after The current disk layout is for Click the OS name to select another operating system in the Operating System Selection window Under bootable media this window appears after clicking Disk management The disk layout will be displayed according to the operating system you select 9 5 Disk management view Acronis Disk Director Lite is controlled through the Disk management view of the console The top part of the view contains a disks and vol
258. ll back period The following table shows full backup and roll back periods for schemes of various levels Number of Full backup On different Roll back levels every days can go period back 2 2 days 1 to 2 days 1 day 3 4 days 2 to 5 days 2 days 4 8 days 4 to 11 days 4 days 5 16 days 8 to 23 days 8 days 6 32 days 16 to 47 days 16 days Adding a level doubles the full backup and roll back periods To see why the number of recovery days varies let us return to the previous example Here are the backups we have on day 12 numbers in gray denote deleted backups Pi 2 3 4 5 67 29 10 11 22 Pee 3 ee A new level 3 differential backup has not yet been created so the backup of day five is still stored Since it depends on the full backup of day one that backup is available as well This enables us to go as far back as 11 days which is the best case scenario The following day however a new third level differential backup is created and the old full backup is deleted pa 2 3 4 5 e671 8 91 10 11 12 13 EMEA This gives us only a four day recovery interval which turns out to be the worst case scenario On day 14 the interval is five days It increases on subsequent days before decreasing again and so on Pa 2 3 4i s5 6 7 89 10 1 12 13 14 a er eee The roll back period shows how many days we are guaranteed to have even in the worst case For a four level scheme it is four days 4
259. lly attached tape device expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To select a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them To select a folder stored on NFS share expand the NFS drives group and click the folder To select FTP or SFTP server expand the corresponding group and click the appropriate folder on the server According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer To assist you with choosing the right vault the table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 1 Click OK 7 1 4 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The software will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters section
260. located on a tape library Free space is a space on the storage device where the vault is located For example if the vault is located on a hard disk the vault free space is the free space of the respective volume Occupied space is the total size of backup archives and their metadata if it is located in the vault You can obtain the total number of archives and backups stored in the vault and full path to the vault For managed vaults only you can examine the name of the storage node that manages the vault encryption and deduplication states Browsing the vault contents and data selection You can browse the vault content and select data to recover by using the Data view tab or the Archive view tab Data view The Data view tab lets you browse and select the backed up data by versions backup date and time The Data view tab shares the same searching and cataloging functionality with the data catalog p 101 Archive view The Archive view tab displays the backed up data by archives Use the Archive view to perform operations with archives and backups stored in the vault For more information about these operations see the following sections Operations with archives stored in a vault p 155 Operations with backups p 156 Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 16 6 1 2 Personal vaults A vault is called personal if it was created using direct connection of the console to a managed machine Personal
261. location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation 7 2 5 Access credentials for destination Specify credentials required for access to the location where the resulting archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the current user credentials The software will access the destination using the credentials of the current user Use the following credentials The software will access the destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the destination Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 7 3 Mounting an image Mounting volumes from a disk backup image lets you access the volumes as though they were physical disks Multiple volumes containe
262. m reboot after dynamic to basic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Dynamic to basic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures safe conversion of a dynamic disk to basic when it contains volumes with data for simple and mirrored volumes in multiboot systems bootability of a system that was offline during the operation 9 6 7 Changing disk status Changing disk status is effective for Windows Vista SP1 Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 operating systems and applies to the current disk layout p 173 One of the following disk statuses always appears in the graphical view of the disk next to the disk s name Online The online status means that a disk is accessible in the read write mode This is the normal disk status If you need a disk to be accessible in the read only mode select the disk and then change its status to offline by selecting Change disk status to offline from the Operations menu Offline The offline status means that a disk is accessible in the read only mode To bring the selected offline disk back to online select Change disk statu
263. m the virtualization host without installing an agent p 228 on the machine Such machine appears in the Virtual machines section If an agent is installed into the guest system the machine appears in the Machines with agents section W WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment A minimal Windows system based on any of the following kernels Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Windows 7 PE 3 0 WinPE is commonly used by OEMs and corporations for deployment test diagnostic and system repair purposes A machine can be booted into WinPE via PXE CD ROM USB flash drive or hard disk Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 227 enables running the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent p 228 in the preinstallation environment
264. me time ensuring that your information can be recovered in case of an accidental data loss Suppose that you need to Perform backups at the end of each working day Be able to recover an accidentally deleted or inadvertently modified file if this has been discovered relatively quickly Have access to a weekly backup for 10 days after it was created Keep monthly backups for half a year Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows Start backup at 6 00 PM Back up on Workdays Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 10 days Monthly 6 months With this scheme you will have a week to recover a previous version of a damaged file from a daily backup as well as 10 day access to weekly backups Each monthly full backup will be available for six months since the creation date Work schedule Suppose you are a part time financial consultant and work in a company on Tuesdays and Thursdays On these days you often make changes to your financial documents statements and update the spreadsheets etc on your laptop To back up this data you may want to Track changes to the financial statements spreadsheets etc performed on Tuesdays and Thursdays daily incremental backup Have a weekly summary of file changes since last month Friday weekly differential backup Have a monthly full backup of your files Moreover assume that you want to retain access to all backups includi
265. mes templates but you cannot use the A11 Files or A11 Profiles Folder templates For more information about templates see Selection rules for volumes and Selection rules for files and folders 4 Toadd another template repeat the step 3 Example The following example illustrates how to replace a directly specified item with selection templates The original section lt specific gt lt backup_type gt disks lt backup_type gt lt disk_level_options gt lt file_level_ options gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt specific gt The section after applying the selection templates lt specific gt lt backup_type gt disks lt backup_type gt lt disk_level_options gt lt file_level_options gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt rules_type gt disks lt rules_type gt lt rules gt lt rule gt BOOT lt rule gt lt rule gt SYSTEM lt rule gt lt rules gt lt inclusion_rules gt lt specific gt 10 1 4 Deploying backup plans as files Assume that for some reason you cannot run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server in your environment but you need to apply one and the same backup plan to multiple machines A good decision is to export the backup plan from one machine and deploy it to all the other machines How it works A dedicated folder for storing deployed plans exists on every machine where an agent is installed The agent tracks changes in the dedicated folder As soon as
266. mines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the backup priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the backup priority might speed up the backup process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources like the CPU to the backup application However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk in out speed or network traffic The preset is Low To specify the backup process priority Select one of the following Low to minimize resources taken by the backup process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine Normal to run the backup process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes High to maximize the backup process speed by taking resources from other processes 4 7 4 2 HDD writing speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when an internal fixed hard disk of the machine being backed up is selected as the backup destination Backing up to a fixed hard disk for example to Acronis Secure Zone may slow performance of the operating system and applications because of the large amounts of data that needs to be written to the disk You can limit the hard disk usage by the backup process to the desired level The preset is Maximum To set the desired HDD writing speed for backup Do any
267. mple Then the list of backup files after day two is the following MyArchive 1 31 2011 tib full created on January 31 at noon MyArchive 2 1 2011 tib full created on February 1 at noon This is because the full backups created at midnight were replaced by new full backups of the same day 4 3 3 Backup splitting and simplified file naming When a backup is split according to backup splitting p 81 settings the same indexing is used to also name parts of the backup The file name for the next backup will have the next available index For example suppose that the first backup of the archive MyData has been split in two parts Then the file names for this backup are MyData1 tib and MyData2 tib The second backup supposing that it is not split will be named MyData3 tib 4 4 Scheduling Acronis scheduler helps the administrator adapt backup plans to the company s daily routine and each employee s work style The plans tasks will be launched systematically keeping the critical data safely protected The scheduling is available when creating a backup plan p 29 with any of the following backup schemes Simple Custom or Tower of Hanoi The schedule also can be set for validation tasks p 143 The scheduler uses local time of the machine the backup plan exists on Before creating a schedule be sure the machine s date and time settings are correct Schedule To define when a task has to be executed you need to speci
268. n Layer HAL HDD controller driver and network adapter driver s Ifthe drivers are on a vendor s disc or other removable media turn on the Search removable media Ifthe drivers are located in a networked folder or on the bootable media specify the path to the folder by clicking Add folder During recovery Universal Restore will perform the recursive search in all the sub folders of the specified folder find the most suitable HAL and HDD controller drivers of all those available and install them into the recovered system Universal Restore also searches for the network adapter driver the path to the found driver is then transmitted by Universal Restore to the operating system If the hardware has multiple network interface cards Universal Restore will try to configure all the cards drivers Mass storage drivers to install anyway To access this setting expand Show mass storage drivers to install anyway You need this setting if The target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as RAID especially NVIDIA RAID or a fibre channel adapter You recover a system to a virtual machine that uses a SCSI hard drive controller and is booted into bootable media Use SCSI drivers bundled with your virtualization software or download the latest drivers versions from the software manufacturer Web site If the automatic drivers search does not help to boot the system Specify the appropriate drivers by clicking Add dri
269. n do a disk level backup in the operating system Do not try to back up using bootable media or Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Software specific recovery procedures Microsoft BitLocker Drive Encryption To recover a system that was encrypted by BitLocker 1 Boot from the bootable media 2 Recover the system The recovered data will be unencrypted 3 Reboot the recovered system 4 Turn on BitLocker If you only need to recover one partition of a multi partitioned disk do so under the operating system Recovery under bootable media may make the recovered partition undetectable for Windows McAfee Endpoint Encryption and PGP Whole Disk Encryption You can recover an encrypted system partition by using bootable media only If the recovered system fails to boot rebuild Master Boot Record as described in the following Acronis knowledge base article Restoring Windows Boot Loader Manually and reboot 3 7 Support for SNMP SNMP objects Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications Type of event Object identifier OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 Syntax OctetString The value may be Information Warning Error and Unknown Unknown is sent only in the test message Text description of the event Object identifier OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 Syntax OctetString The value contains the text description of
270. nal OK 5 Optional If you want to add backups from another machine attach the media to that machine and perform the same steps You need a separate Initial Seeding license for each machine that you want to back up 6 Package p 212 the media along with a prepaid return shipping label and send it to Acronis by physical mail The address is available on your account management Web page gt Initial Seeding Recovery tab gt Orders in process gt Initial Seeding orders gt Datacenter address On the same Web page mark the order as shipped and track p 214 the order status Once you observe that the backup has been uploaded on the online storage you can edit the backup plan to do incremental backups In Backup scheme select Run now Manual start for manual backups or Simple for scheduled backups For Simple specify the schedule and optionally the retention rule Click Save When started manually or on schedule your backup plan will add incremental backups to the initial backup stored in the online storage 11 1 6 9 How to package a hard drive for shipment It is very important that your hard drive be packaged carefully Careful packaging will protect your drive from any damage during shipment Hard drive types Acronis accepts hard disk drives of the following interface types IDE ATA SATA USB connected drives SCSI drives are not accepted Packaging If possible use the original packaging O
271. ng the daily ones for at least six months The following GFS scheme suits such purposes Start backup at 11 30 PM Back up on Tuesday Thursday Friday Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 6 months Weekly 6 months Monthly 5 years Here daily incremental backups will be created on Tuesdays and Thursdays with weekly and monthly backups performed on Fridays Note that in order to choose Friday in the Weekly monthly field you need to first select it in the Back up on field Such an archive would allow you to compare your financial documents as of the first and the last day of work and have a five year history of all documents etc No daily backups Consider a more exotic GFS scheme Start backup at 12 00 PM Back up on Friday a Weekly monthly Friday Keep backups Daily 1 week Weekly 1 month Monthly indefinitely Backup is thus performed only on Fridays This makes Friday the only choice for weekly and monthly backups leaving no other date for daily backups The resulting Grandfather Father archive will hence consist only of weekly differential and monthly full backups Even though it is possible to use GFS to create such an archive the Custom scheme is more flexible in this situation 4 2 5 4 Custom backup scheme Ata glance Custom schedule and conditions for backups of each type Custom schedule and retention rules Parameters Parameter Meaning Full backup schedul
272. ng the disk signature may be desirable due to the following reasons Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 schedules tasks using the signature of the source hard disk If you recover the same disk signature you don t need to re create or edit the tasks created previously Some installed applications use disk signature for licensing and other purposes This enables you to keep all the Windows Restore Points on the recovered disk To recover VSS snapshots used by Windows Vista s Previous Versions feature Keep existing The program will leave the NT signature of the target hard disk untouched How the automatic mapping works Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 automatically maps the disks or volumes to the target disks only if the system bootability can be preserved Otherwise the automatic mapping is canceled and you have to map the disks or volumes manually Also you have to map the volumes manually if they are Linux logical volumes or Linux software RAID MD devices For more information on recovering logical volumes and MD devices see Recovering MD devices and logical volumes The automatic mapping is performed as follows 1 If the disk or volume is recovered to its original location the mapping process reproduces the original disk volume layout The original location for a disk or volume means exactly the same disk or volume that has been backed up A volume will not be considered original if its size location or oth
273. nis Backup amp Recovery 11 on the machine you want to back up start the product click Back up now or Create backup plan click Location and click Get trial subscription Log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet A trial subscription will be automatically created and assigned to the machine 11 4 Activating online backup subscriptions To be able to back up a machine to the online storage you need to purchase and activate a subscription to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service You can purchase subscriptions on the Acronis Web site or from an Acronis reseller Before activating a subscription please take into account the following considerations As soon as a subscription is activated its subscription period starts To avoid losing subscription time activate the subscription only when you are ready to back up the machine Ifa machine already has a subscription the new subscription will replace the old one You can reassign the old subscription to a different machine see Reassigning an activated subscription later in this section 11 4 1 Activating subscriptions To begin with make sure that the machines whose subscriptions you want to activate are registered on the management server and available turned on To activate subscriptions Connect the console to the management server In the Actions pane click Activate online backup subscriptions Specify the credentials to log in to the o
274. nline storage Select the machine and then click Select subscription From Available subscriptions select the subscription that you want to activate for the machine Click Activate now SOY Pr oe Ne Perform the previous three steps for each machine for which you want to activate a subscription Alternatively you can activate a subscription when the console is connected to a machine instead of the management server 11 4 2 Activating subscriptions To activate a subscription Start Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 In the Actions pane click Activate online backup subscription Specify the credentials to log in to the online storage From Available subscriptions select the subscription that you want to activate for the machine OP WN Click Activate now 11 4 3 Reassigning an activated subscription Sometimes you may want to use an already activated subscription instead of an available subscription In these cases for example You no longer need to back up one of your machines and you want to reuse that machine s subscription for another machine You reinstalled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 on a machine and want to resume its online backups You recovered a machine to bare metal or to a state when it did not yet have an activated subscription and want to resume its online backups Reassigning a subscription does not restart its subscription period To assign an activated subscription to a machine 1 On
275. not be automatically found and opened To prevent this you can manually change the letters that are automatically assigned to the volumes by the operating system If you need to change a letter assigned to a volume by the operating system 1 Select a volume to change a letter 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change letter in the context menu 3 Select a new letter in the Change Letter window 4 By clicking OK in the Change Letter window you ll add a pending operation to volume letter assignment To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 9 7 5 Change volume label The volume label is an optional attribute It is a name assigned to a volume for easier recognition For example one volume could be called SYSTEM a volume with an operating system or PROGRAM an application volume DATA a data volume etc but it does not imply that only the type of data stated with the label could be stored on such a volume In Windows volume labels are shown in the Explorer disk and folder tree LABEL1 C LABEL2 D LABEL3 E etc LABEL1 LABEL2 and LABEL3 are volume labels A volume label is shown in all application dialog boxes for opening and saving files If you need to change a volume label 1 R
276. not licensed In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 the console is installed together with the agent and cannot be disconnected from it Bootable Media Builder With Bootable Media Builder you can create bootable media in order to use the agents and other rescue utilities in a rescue environment In stand alone editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Bootable Media Builder is installed together with the agent All add ons to the agent if installed will be available in a rescue environment 1 2 1 Agent for Windows This agent enables disk level and file level data protection under Windows Disk backup Disk level data protection is based on backing up either a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all the information necessary for the operating system to boot or all the disk sectors using the sector by sector approach raw mode A backup that contains a copy of a disk or a volume ina packaged form is called a disk volume backup or a disk volume image It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well as individual folders or files File backup File level data protection is based on backing up files and folders residing on the machine where the agent is installed or on a network share Files can be recovered to their original location or to another place It is possible to recover all files and folders that were backed up or select which of them to recover Othe
277. not schedule the task select this check box if you wish to start the task manually later On schedule to schedule the task To learn more about how to configure the scheduling parameters please see the Scheduling p 53 section 7 1 6 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 see the Owners and credentials p 21 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine section 7 2 Exporting archives and backups The export operation creates a copy of an archive or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The original archive remains untouched The export
278. nt each machine user to receive a separate DRP e mail about his her machine only a Usethe MachineName variable to show the name of the certain machine in the e mail subject b Setup your mail server or client to filter or forward e mails using the Subject field 4 Enter the parameters of access to the SMTP server For more detailed information see E mail notifications p 131 5 Optional Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct 4 7 8 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during backup Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction except for handling bad sectors which is defined as a separate option If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 30 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified numb
279. nt for ESX i is installed Click Recover to open the Recover data p 97 page Click Select data p 99 Use the Data view tab or the Archive view tab to select the disks or volumes to convert In Recover to select New virtual machine 5 Only if the console is connected to the management server Click Browse Select the machine with agent that will perform conversion In VM type select the resulting virtual machine type and location Optional In Virtual machine settings p 122 you can change the path to the new virtual machine rename the machine change the disk provisioning mode the allocated memory and other settings The same type of machines with the same name cannot be created in the same folder Change either the VM name or the path if you get an error message caused by identical names 8 The destination disk for each of the source disks or source volumes and MBRs will be selected automatically If required you can change the destination disks On a Microsoft Virtual PC be sure to recover the disk or volume where the operating system s loader resides to the Hard disk 1 Otherwise the operating system will not boot This cannot be fixed by changing the boot device order in BIOS because a Virtual PC ignores these settings 9 In When to recover specify when to start the recovery task 10 Optional In Task parameters review Recovery options and change the settings from the default ones if need be Y
280. nts of the backup operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the backup operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Log the following event types to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged All events log all events information warnings and errors Errors and warnings Errors only Do not log to disable logging events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log 4 7 10 Fast incremental differential backup The option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for incremental and differential disk level backup This option defines whether a file change is detected using the file size and time stamp or by comparing the file contents to those stored in the archive The preset is Enabled Incremental or differential backup captures only data changes To speed up the backup process the program determines whether a file has changed or not by the file size and the date time
281. o a volume that exceeds that limit without changing the file system It would make sense here to change the file system from FAT16 to FAT32 Older operating systems MS DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 x 4 x do not support FAT32 and will not be operable after you recover a volume and change its file system These can be normally recovered on a FAT16 volume only Volume partition alignment Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 automatically eliminates volume misalignment a situation when volume clusters are not aligned with disk sectors The misalignment occurs when recovering volumes created with the Cylinder Head Sector CHS addressing scheme to ahard disk drive HDD or solid state drive SSD drive that has a 4 KB sector size The CHS addressing scheme is used for example in all Windows operating systems earlier than Windows Vista If volumes are misaligned the cluster overlaps more physical sectors than it would have occupied if aligned As a result more physical sectors need to be erased and rewritten each time the data changes The redundant read write operations noticeably slow down the disk speed and overall system performance SSD drive misalignment decreases not only system performance but drive lifetime Since SSD memory cells are designed for a certain amount of read write operations redundant read write operations lead to early degradation of the SSD drive When recovering dynamic volumes and logical volumes created in Linux
282. o be executed before the backup process starts 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the backup Perform the backup bechlp AIRE UNS concurrently with only after the command is the command command is executed despite execution and successfully execution failure irrespective of the executed Fail the or success command execution task if the command result execution fails A command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero 4 7 17 2 Post backup command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the backup is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file
283. o be overwritten you still have an option to prevent overwriting of specific files by excluding them from the recovery operation Recovery exclusions p 110 Specify files and folders you do not wish to be recovered Recovery exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific files you do not wish to recover Use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks Files whose names match any of the masks will be skipped during recovery You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples ee nn Windows and Linux By name F log Excludes all files named F log F Excludes all folders named F By mask log Excludes all files with the log extension F Excludes all files and folders with names starting with F such as folders F F1 and files F log F1 log By mask F log Excludes all log files with names consisting of four symbols and starting with F By file path Finance F log Excludes files named F log from all folders with the name Finance By folder path Finance F or Finance F Excludes folders name
284. o store the database including the four level description Volume Component Partition Disk for each dynamic volume If during the conversion to dynamic it turns out that the basic disk is full and the size of its volumes cannot be decreased automatically the basic disk to dynamic conversion operation will fail Should you decide to revert your dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks you can convert your disks using the same menu items though the operation now will be named Convert to basic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after basic to dynamic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Basic to dynamic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures bootability of an offline operating system on the disk after the operation 9 6 6 Disk conversion dynamic to basic You would want to convert dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks If you need to
285. ocations including the primary one The preset is Disabled To specify the inactivity time select the Do not start replication cleanup within the following time check box and then select the days and the time period during the day Usage example You may want to use this option to separate the backup process from replication or cleanup For example suppose that you back up machines locally during the day and replicate the backups to a network folder Make the inactivity time contain the working hours Replication will be performed after the working hours when network load is lower 4 5 6 Usage examples This section provides examples of how you can replicate backups and set up retention rules for them 4 5 6 1 Example 1 Replicating backups to a network folder Consider the following scenario You want to perform a full backup of your machine manually You want to store the backups in Acronis Secure Zone p 139 on the machine You want to store a copy of the backups in a network folder In this scenario create a backup plan with the Manual start scheme When creating the backup plan specify Acronis Secure Zone in the Path field select Full in the Backup type field select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box and then specify the network folder in the 2nd location field Result You can recover the machine s volumes or files from a readily available local backup which is stored in a d
286. of Hanoi create a custom backup scheme or back up data once Replication and retention settings p 66 Not available when choosing simplified naming of backup files p 48 Define whether to copy replicate the backups to another location and whether to move or delete them according to retention rules The available settings depend on the backup scheme 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine To access these settings click Show 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine 2nd location Optional To set up replication of backups select the Replicate just created backup to another location check box For more information about backup replication see Setting up replication of backups p 68 When to validate p 46 Optional Depending on the selected backup scheme define when and how often to perform validation and whether to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Convert to virtual machine p 72 Optional Applies to disk or volume backup backup of entire virtual machines or volumes of a virtual machine Set up a regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine Plan parameters Plan name Optional Enter a unique name for the backup plan A conscious name lets you identify the plan among others Backup options Optional Configure parameters of the backup operation such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allocated for the b
287. of backups or moving them to different locations consider creating a backup plan Configuring immediate backup is similar to creating a backup plan p 29 except for the following There are no options to schedule backups and to set up retention rules Simplified naming of backup files p 48 is used if the backup destination supports it Otherwise the standard backup naming is used The following locations do not support simplified file naming managed vaults tape Acronis Secure Zone or Acronis Online Backup Storage Conversion of a disk level backup to a virtual machine is not available as a part of the backup operation You can convert the resulting backup afterwards 4 2 Creating a backup plan Before creating your first backup plan p 229 please familiarize yourself with the basic concepts used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 To create a backup plan perform the following steps What to back up Items to back up p 31 Select the type of data to back up and specify the data items The type of data depends on the agents installed on the machine Access credentials exclusions To access these settings click Show access credentials exclusions Access credentials p 32 Provide credentials for the source data if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Exclusions p 32 Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up Where to back up Location
288. of incremental backups in an archive becomes long conversion of an incremental backup to a full one increases the reliability of your archive You may also want to convert a differential backup if there are incremental backups that depend on it During the conversion the selected incremental or differential backup is replaced with a full backup for the same point in time The previous backups in the chain are not changed All subsequent incremental and differential backups up to the nearest full backup are also updated The new backup versions are created first and only after that are the old ones deleted Therefore the location must have enough space to temporarily store both the old and the new versions Conversion does not create a copy of a backup To obtain a self sufficient copy of the backup on a flash drive or removable media use the export p 146 operation Example You have the following backup chain in your archive F1 I2 I3 I4 D5 I6 I7 I8 F9 110 111 D12 F13 Here F means full backup I incremental D differential You convert to full the 14 backup The 14 D5 16 I7 18 backups will be updated while 110 111 D12 will remain unchanged because they depend on F9 Limitation The Convert to full backup operation is not allowed for backups on tapes and CD DVD 7 4 4 Deleting archives and backups The Backups deletion window displays the same tab as for the vaults view but with check boxes for each archive and backup Th
289. omponent Select the way volumes and network resources will be handled called the media style A media with Linux style volume handling displays the volumes as for example hda1 and sdb2 It tries to reconstruct MD devices and logical LVM volumes before starting a recovery A media with Windows style volume handling displays the volumes as for example C and D It provides access to dynamic LDM volumes The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Linux based bootable media p 161 for details PE based bootable media Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to WinPE distributions based on any of the following kernels Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 Windows Vista PE 2 0 Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Windows 7 PE 3 0 If you already have media with PE1 x distribution unpack the media ISO to a local folder and start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x p 165 for details To be able to create or modify PE 2 x or 3 0 images install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK is installed The further operations are described in the Addin
290. on you obtain a copy of your server or workstation on a virtual machine which can be readily powered on in case the original machine fails Restrictions Conversion is not available on machines running Linux Conversion of a backup from the following locations is not available CD DVD tape devices and Acronis Online Backup Storage If you have set up copying or moving backups to other locations p 66 you cannot set up conversion from any of these locations Conversion is always performed from the first location of a backup The following section provides information that helps you make the appropriate settings Convert to virtual machine When to convert Depending on the selected backup scheme specify whether to convert every full every incremental or every differential backup or convert the last created backup on schedule Specify the conversion schedule p 73 if required Browse p 73 Specify the machine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for ESX i Agent for Hyper V or Agent for Windows installed The conversion can be performed by the agent that performs the backup or by an agent installed on another machine If the latter is the case the archive must be stored in a shared location such as a network folder or a managed vault so that the other machine can access the archive VM type p 122 Here you select the resulting virtual machine type and location
291. on Environment WinPE without the help of an operating system Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk with an unsupported file system back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason A machine can be booted into the above environments either with physical media or using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server Windows Deployment Services WDS or Remote Installation Services RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can be thought of as a kind of bootable media too You can create bootable media or configure the PXE server or WDS RIS using the same wizard Linux based bootable media Linux based media contains Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Bootable Agent based on Linux kernel The agent can boot and perform operations on any PC compatible hardware including bare metal and machines with corrupted or non supported file systems The operations can be configured and controlled either locally or remotely using the management console PE based bootable media PE based bootable media contains a minimal Windows system called Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE and Ac
292. on the selected data will be recovered to 5 1 4 1 Selecting target disks Available disk or volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected disks will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below New virtual machine If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows is installed The selected disks will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 122 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Ag
293. operation can be applied to A single archive an exact archive copy will be created Asingle backup an archive consisting of a single full backup will be created The export of an incremental or a differential backup is performed using consolidation of the preceding backups up to the nearest full backup Your choice of backups belonging to the same archive the resulting archive will contain only the specified backups Consolidation is performed as required so the resulting archive may contain full incremental and differential backups Usage scenarios Export enables you to separate a specific backup from a chain of incremental backups for fast recovery writing onto removable or detachable media or other purposes Example When backing up data to a remote location through an unstable or low bandwidth network connection such as backing up through WAN using VPN access you may want to save the initial full backup to a detachable media Then send the media to the remote location There the backup will be exported from the media to the target storage Subsequent incremental backups which are usually much smaller can be transferred over the network By exporting a managed vault to a detachable media you obtain a portable unmanaged vault that can be used in the following scenarios Keeping an off site copy of your vault or of the most important archives Physical transportation of a vault to a distant branch office Re
294. opped Last result is Not run yet means that the task has never been started or Succeeded or Not run has been started but has not finished yet and therefore its yet result is not available You may want to find out why the task has not started so far 10 1 3 Export and import of backup plans The export operation creates a file with complete configuration of the backup plan You can import the file to reuse the exported backup plan on another machine Centralized backup plans can be exported from a management server and imported to a management server only You can edit plans in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 graphical user interface when importing them or after Backup plans are exported to xml files so you can edit the export files of backup plans p 194 with text editors Passwords are encrypted in the export files Usage examples Agent reinstallation Export the backup plans before reinstalling the agent and import them after reinstalling Deploying of a backup plan to multiple machines You have an environment where using of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server is not possible for example because of security restrictions Nevertheless you want to use the same backup plan on multiple machines Export this plan from one of the machines and deploy it as a file p 196 to the other machines Adjusting credentials A scheduled plan contains credentials of the user account under which the plan s
295. or Parallels Workstation This selection is done in the VM type p 122 step In the Storage step you can select the virtual machine path What is the machine s processing power Conversion will take the selected machine s CPU resource Multiple conversion tasks will be queued on that machine and it may take considerable time to complete them all Consider this when creating a centralized backup plan with conversion for multiple machines or multiple local backup plans using the same machine for conversion What storage will be used for the virtual machines Network usage As opposed to ordinary backups TIB files virtual machine files are transferred uncompressed through the network Therefore using a SAN or a storage local to the machine that performs conversion is the best choice from the network usage standpoint A local disk is not an option though if the conversion is performed by the same machine that is backed up Using a NAS also makes good sense Storage space Disks of the resulting virtual machine will use as much storage space as the original data occupies Assuming that the original disk size is 100 GB and the disk stores 10 GB of data the corresponding virtual disk will occupy about 10 GB VMware calls this format thin provisioning Microsoft uses the dynamically expanding disk term Since the space is not pre allocated the physical storage is expected to have sufficient free space for the virtual disks to increas
296. or clear the respective check box 2 1 3 5 Startup page This option defines whether to show the Welcome screen or the Dashboard view on the console connection to the management server The preset is the Welcome screen To make a selection select or clear the check box for Show the Dashboard view This option can also be set on the Welcome screen If you select the check box for At startup show the Dashboard instead of the current view on the Welcome screen the setting mentioned above will be updated accordingly 3 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 This section attempts to give its readers a clear understanding of the product so that they can use the product in various circumstances without step by step instructions 3 1 Owners and credentials This section explains the concept of owner and the meaning of a backup plan s or task s credentials Plan task owner A local backup plan owner is the user who created or last modified the plan A centralized backup plan owner is the management server administrator who created or last modified the centralized backup plan Tasks belonging to a backup plan either local or centralized are owned by the backup plan owner Tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as the recovery task are owned by the user who has created or last modified the task Managing a plan task owned by another user Having Administrator privileges on the machine a user can modify tasks
297. orage for a specific period of time Subscription period The period during which the subscription remains activated You can back up and recover the machine during this period Recovery is possible for extra 30 days after this period ends Unassign a subscription Make an assigned subscription available again You can unassign a subscription as long as it is not activated 12 Glossary A Acronis Active Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started The system boots from the backup p 233 and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Limitations the backup must be located on the local drive any device available through the BIOS except for network boot does not work with Linux images Acronis Plug in for WinPE A modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows that can run in the preinstallation environment The plug in can be added to a WinPE p 240 image using Bootable Media Builder The resulting bootable media p 229 can be used to boot any PC compatible machine and perform with certain limitations most of the direct management p 232 operations without the help of an operating system Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI o
298. ored in the Master Boot Record Avolume created using Logical Volume Manager LVM for Linux kernel LVM gives an administrator the flexibility to redistribute large storage space on demand add new and take out old physical disks without interrupting user service Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent p 228 for Linux can access back up and recover logical volumes when running in Linux with 2 6 x kernel or a Linux based bootable media p 229 M Machine A physical or virtual computer uniquely identified by an operating system installation Machines with multiple operating systems multi boot systems are considered as multiple machines Managed machine A machine p 236 either physical or virtual where at least one Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent p 228 is installed Managed vault A centralized vault p 231 managed by a storage node p 239 Archives p 228 in a managed vault can be accessed as follows bsp node_address vault_name archive_name Physically managed vaults can reside on a network share SAN NAS ona hard drive local to the storage node or on a tape library locally attached to the storage node The storage node performs cleanup p 231 and validation p 239 for each archive stored in the managed vault An administrator can specify additional operations that the storage node will perform deduplication p 232 encryption Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management S
299. ot show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Ignore bad sectors Event tracing Windows events log p 84 SNMP p 84 Fast incremental differential backup p 85 File level backup snapshot p 85 File level security p 86 Preserve files security settings in archives In archives store encrypted files in decrypted state Agent for Windows Disk backup Dest HDD Dest network share File backup Disk backup Dest HDD Dest network share Bootable media Linux based or PE based Dest HDD Dest network share File backup Dest HDD Dest network share Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Media components p 86 Dest Dest z j removable removable media media Mount points p 87 7 5 z Multi volume snapshot p t j i 88 Notifications E mail p 88 i Win Pop up p 89 5 5 Pre Post backup commands PE only PE only p 90 Pre Post data capture i z commands p 91 Replication cleanup t t 7 j inactivity time p 70 Sector by sector backup p t t E 93 Task failure handling p 94 E i Task start conditions p 94 j 7 7 Volume Shadow Copy Service p 95 4 7 1 Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the backup operation by selecting or
300. ou can specify in Recovery options gt VM power management whether to start the new virtual machine automatically after the recovery is completed This option is available only when the new machine is created on a virtualization server 11 Click OK If the recovery task is scheduled for the future specify the credentials under which the task will run You will be taken to the Backup plans and tasks view where you can examine the state and progress of the recovery task Post conversion operations The resulting machine always has SCSI disk interface and basic MBR volumes If the machine uses a custom boot loader you might need to configure the loader to point to the new devices and reactivate it Configuring GRUB is described in How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration p 124 Tip If you want to preserve logical LVM volumes on a Linux machine consider the alternative method of conversion Create a new virtual machine boot it using bootable media and perform recovery just like you do on a physical machine The LVM structure can be automatically recreated during recovery 5 5 1 Virtual machine type virtualization server selection The new virtual machine can be created either on a virtualization server this requires Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i to be installed or in any accessible local or networked folder To select the virtualization server the new virtual machine will
301. ou chose and the requirements of the volume type you have previously decided upon If you are creating a dynamic volume and select one or several basic disks as its destination you will receive a warning that the selected disk will be converted to dynamic automatically If need be you will be prompted to add the necessary number of disks to your selection according to the chosen type of the future volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select the type of volume being created p 182 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume size p 183 Set the volume size On the third wizard page you will be able to define the size of the future volume according to the previously made selections In order to choose the necessary size between the minimum and the maximum values use the slider or enter the necessary values into the special windows between the minimum and the maximum values or click on the special handle and hold and drag the borders of the disk s picture with the cursor The maximum value normally includes the most possible unallocated space But in some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of the disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic For basic volumes if some unalloc
302. overing of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Click amp Export The Export p 146 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source The export of a backup creates a new archive with a self sufficient copy of the backup in the location you specify Click Convert to full backup to replace the incremental or differential backup with a full backup for the same point in time See Converting a backup to full p 157 for more information Delete a single or Select one of the backups you want to delete then click x Delete multiple backups The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 157 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired backups then confirm the deletion Delete all archives and _ Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part backups in the vault of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click 6 Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 157 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 7 4 3 Converting a backup to full When the chain
303. overy 10 Example You back up your machine to a local folder The backup is immediately copied to a network folder In the original local folder the backup is stored for just one month The following picture illustrates this example Primary Second location location Copy Machine Back up to Local folder immediately Network folder to Delete from here after 1 month Usage scenarios Reliable disaster recovery p 71 Store your backups both on site for immediate recovery and off site to secure the backups from local storage failure or a natural disaster Keeping only the latest recovery points p 71 Delete older backups from a fast storage according to retention rules in order to not overuse expensive storage space Reduced costs of storing the backed up data Store your backups on a fast storage for as long as a need to access them is likely Then move them to a lower cost storage to keep them there for a longer term This enables you to meet legal requirements on data retention Replication and retention in backup schemes The following table shows availability of replication and retention rules in various backup schemes Backup scheme Can copy Can move Can delete backups backups backups Run now p 35 Yes No No Manual start p 43 Yes No No Simple p 35 Yes Yes Yes Grandfather Father Son Yes No Yes GFS p 35 Tower of Hanoi p 41 Yes No Yes Custom p 39 Yes Yes Yes Initial seeding p 44 No
304. p 114 section for more details A Windows system can be brought online in seconds while it is still being recovered Using the proprietary Acronis Active Restore p 118 technology Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will boot the machine into the operating system found in the backup as if the system were on the physical disk The system becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services Thus the system downtime will be minimal A dynamic volume can be recovered over an existing volume to unallocated space of a disk group or to unallocated space of a basic disk To learn more about recovering dynamic volumes please turn to the Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows p 25 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows has the ability to recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA or Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM The virtual appliance can then be imported to XenServer You can move the files of the Kernel based Virtual Machine to a machine running Linux from there you can run this virtual machine by using the Virtual Machine Manager program The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i you can create a n
305. p Personal Items to back Remove Disks Volumes Show Log i F Aerts D Show access credentials exdusions Tape management gt Disk management m Where to back up Backup plans and tasks 7 Location Resuired Shortcuts W Show backup file naming archive comments Local machine Machine 14 ru corp g M j How to back up 2 Backup scheme Back up now Y Start the backup immediately after the plan is created Backup type Full v 2nd location l Replicate just created backup to another location When to Never validate Help Cancel Action page Create backup plan Using controls and specifying settings Use active controls to specify a backup plan or recovery task settings and parameters By default such fields as credentials options comments and some others are hidden Most settings are configured by clicking the respective Show links Others are selected from the drop down list or typed manually in the page s fields m Where to back up Location l Required W Show backup file naming archive comments Action page Controls Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 remembers the changes you made on the action pages For example if you started to create a backup plan and then for any reason switched to another view without accomplishing the plan creation you can click the Back navigation button on the menu Or if you have passed several steps forward click the Down arrow and select the page where
306. p Recovery 11 Management Console is an administrative tool for local access to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 agent Remote connection to the agent is not possible 1 2 3 Bootable Media Builder Acronis Bootable Media Builder is a dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 229 The media builder that installs on Windows can create bootable media based on either Windows Preinstallation Environment or Linux kernel The Universal Restore p 10 add on enables you to create bootable media with the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 1 3 Supported file systems Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 can back up and recover the following file systems with the following limitations FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 ReiserFS3 particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Node ReiserFS4 volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Node XFS volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Node JFS particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Storage Nod
307. p facilitates archive cleanup because it can be easily deleted along with the weekly set of daily incremental backups depending on it Backing up with the full incremental or differential backup method results in a backup p 228 of the corresponding type Full backup A full backup stores all data selected for backup A full backup underlies any archive and forms the base for incremental and differential backups An archive can contain multiple full backups or consist of only full backups A full backup is self sufficient you do not need access to any other backup to recover data from a full backup It is widely accepted that a full backup is the slowest to do but the fastest to restore With Acronis technologies recovery from an incremental backup may be not slower than recovery from a full one A full backup is most useful when you need to roll back the system to its initial state this initial state does not change often so there is no need for regular backup Example An Internet cafe school or university lab where the administrator often undoes changes made by the students or guests but rarely updates the reference backup in fact after installing software updates only The backup time is not crucial in this case and the recovery time will be minimal when recovering the systems from the full backup The administrator can have several copies of the full backup for additional reliability Incremental backup An increment
308. pecify the network name or IP address of the proxy server for example proxy example com or 192 168 0 1 3 In Port specify the port number of the proxy server for example 80 4 Ifthe proxy server requires authentication specify the credentials in User name and Password 5 To test the proxy server settings click Test connection If you do not know the proxy server settings contact your network administrator or Internet service provider for assistance Alternatively you can try to take these settings from your Web browser s configuration This is how to find them in three popular browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer On the Tools menu click Internet Options On the Connections tab click LAN settings Mozilla Firefox On the Tools menu click Options and then click Advanced On the Network tab under Connection click Settings Google Chrome In Options click Under the Hood Under Network click Change proxy settings 11 Online backup This section provides details about using the Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online service This service enables you to do online backups to Acronis Online Backup Storage Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http www acronis com my backup recovery online To configure backup to the online storage or recovery from the storage follow the regular steps described in the corresponding sections Creating a
309. pleted and specify post data capture commands that will resume the database operations after the snapshot is taken Volume shadow copy writers Before backing up the data of VSS aware applications make sure that the volume shadow copy writers for those applications are turned on by examining the list of writers that are present in the operating system To view this list run the following command vssadmin list writers Note In Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 the writer for Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is turned off by default For instructions on how to turn it on see the corresponding Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 838183 en 5 Recovery When it comes to data recovery first consider the most functional method connect the console to the managed machine running the operating system and create the recovery task If the machine s operating system fails to start or you need to recover data to bare metal boot the machine from the bootable media p 229 or using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and configure recovery Acronis Universal Restore lets you recover and boot up operating systems on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 enables you to transfer Windows operating systems between BlIOS based hardware and hardware that supports Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI See the Recovering BIOS based systems to UEFI based and back
310. preset is Automatic The following settings are available Automatic With this setting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 will act as follows When backing up to a hard disk A single backup file will be created if the destination disk s file system allows the estimated file size The backup will automatically be split into several files if the destination disk s file system does not allow the estimated file size Such might be the case when the backup is placed on FAT16 and FAT32 file systems that have a 4GB file size limit If the destination disk runs out of free space while creating the backup the task enters the Need interaction state You have the ability to free additional space and retry the operation If you do so the resulting backup will be split into the parts created before and after the retry When backing up to removable media CD DVD or a tape device locally attached to the managed machine The task will enter the Need interaction state and ask for a new media when the previous one is full Fixed size Enter the desired file size or select it from the drop down list The backup will then be split into multiple files of the specified size This comes in handy when creating a backup that you plan to burn to multiple CDs or DVDs later on You might also want to split the backup destined to an FTP server since data recovery directly from an FTP server requires the backup to be split into files no more than 2GB in s
311. protect the archive from unauthorized access 1 Select the Set password for the archive check box In the Enter the password field type a password In the Confirm the password field re type the password Select one of the following Do not encrypt the archive will be protected with the password only AES 128 the archive will be encrypted using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES algorithm with a 128 bit key AES 192 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 192 bit key AES 256 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 256 bit key 5 Click OK The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The larger the key size the longer it will take for the program to encrypt the archive and the more secure your data will be The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible 4 7 3 Backup cataloging Cataloging a backup adds the contents of the backup to the data catalog Using the data catalog you can easily find the required version of data and select it for recov
312. ps If there is only one full backup left and a full backup is in progress then delete the last full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups If there is only one full backup left and an incremental or differential backup is in progress an error occurs saying there is a lack of available space This setting is recommended when backing up to a USB drive or Acronis Secure Zone This setting is not applicable to managed vaults FTP and SFTP servers This setting enables deletion of the last backup in the archive in case your storage device cannot accommodate more than one backup However you might end up with no backups if the program is not able to create the new backup for some reason Apply retention rules Specifies when to apply the retention rules p 69 only if the retention rules For example the cleanup procedure can be set up to run after each backup and are set also on schedule This option is available only if you have set at least one retention rule in Retention rules Cleanup schedule Specifies a schedule for archive cleanup only if On schedule is For example the cleanup can be scheduled to start on the last day of each selected month This option is available only if you selected On schedule in Apply retention rules 2nd location 3rd location Specifies where to copy or move p 66 the backups from the current location and so on This option is available only if you selected either the
313. ps to the same archive is not allowed 1 Selecting the export destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the tree To export data to a centralized unmanaged vault expand the Centralized vaults group and click the vault To export data to a personal vault expand the Personal vaults group and click the vault To export data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder To export data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself To export data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials
314. ptimal way is to add two schedules to the task First daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 4 hours From 08 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set Second daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 2 hour s From 03 00 00 PM Until 07 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set 4 4 2 Weekly schedule Weekly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a weekly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt week s on lt gt Specify a certain number of weeks and the days of the week you want the task to be run For example with the Every 2 week s on Mon setting the task will be performed on Monday of every other week In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have
315. ptional Network port p 164 the TCP port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection 7 The type of media to create You can create CD DVD or other bootable media such as removable USB flash drives if the hardware BIOS allows for boot from such media build an ISO image of a bootable disc to burn it later on a blank disc upload the selected components to Acronis PXE Server upload the selected components to a WDS RIS 8 optional Windows system drivers to be used by Acronis Universal Restore p 164 This window appears only if the Acronis Universal Restore add on is installed and a media other than PXE or WDS RIS is selected 9 Path to the media ISO file or the name or IP and credentials for PXE or WDS RIS 8 1 1 1 Kernel parameters This window lets you specify one or more parameters of the Linux kernel They will be automatically applied when the bootable media starts These parameters are typically used when experiencing problems while working with the bootable media Normally you can leave this field empty You also can specify any of these parameters by pressing F11 while in the boot menu Parameters When specifying multiple parameters separate them with spaces acpi off Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration noapic Disables Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller
316. r MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the backup process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped 4 2 4 Access credentials for archive location Specify credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the Plan parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK Warning According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 4 2 5 Backup schemes Choose one of the
317. r delete them afterward The rules will be applied to all the backups taken on the specific machine and put in this specific location by this specific backup plan In Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 such set of backups is called an archive To set up retention rules for backups 1 Specify one of the following options a and b are mutually exclusive a Backups older than and or Archive size greater than A backup will be stored until the specified condition or both of the conditions are met Example Backups older than 5 days Archive size greater than 100 GB With these settings a backup will be stored until it is older than five days and the size of the archive containing it exceeds 100 GB b Number of backups in the archive exceeds If the number of backups exceeds the specified value one or more of the oldest backups will be moved or deleted The minimal setting is 1 2 Select whether to delete the backups or to move them to another location if the specified conditions are met You will be able to specify the location where to move the backups and set up retention rules for that location after you click OK Deleting the last backup in the archive The retention rules are effective if the archive contains more than one backup This means that the last backup in the archive will be kept even if a retention rule violation is detected Please do not try to delete the only backup you have by applying the retention rules b
318. r operations Conversion to a virtual machine Rather than converting a disk backup to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Agent for Windows performs the conversion by recovering a disk backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA or Red Hat Kernel based Virtual Machine KVM Files of the fully configured and operational machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage Disk management Agent for Windows includes Acronis Disk Director Lite a handy disk management utility Disk management operations such as cloning disks converting disks creating formatting and deleting volumes changing a disk partitioning style between MBR and GPT or changing a disk label can be performed either in the operating system or using bootable media 1 2 1 1 Universal Restore The Universal Restore add on enables you to use the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality on the machine where the agent is installed and create bootable media with this functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 1 2 2 Management Console Acronis Backup am
319. r remotely using the console p 231 Acronis Secure Zone A secure volume for storing backup archives p 228 within a managed machine p 237 Advantages enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users can serve as the primary location from which backups are replicated further Limitation Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk p 233 Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 237 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM A modification of the bootable agent p 229 residing on the system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed Acronis Startup Recovery Manager eliminates the need for rescue media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media Limitation requires re activation of loaders other than Windows loaders and GRUB Acronis Universal Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that helps boot
320. r starting from the first one when the program prompts If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device Tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section of the product Help If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 5 1 1 2 Data catalog Data catalog lets you easily find the required vers
321. re saving the backup to its destination Encrypted vault A managed vault p 237 to which anything written is encrypted and anything read is decrypted transparently by the storage node p 239 using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to the storage node Encrypted archives p 235 will be encrypted over the encryption performed by the agent p 228 Export An operation that creates a copy of an archive p 228 or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The export operation can be applied to a single archive a single backup p 228 or to your choice of backups belonging to the same archive An entire vault p 240 can be exported by using the command line interface F Full backup A self sufficient backup p 228 containing all data chosen for backup You do not need access to any other backup to recover the data from a full backup G GFS Grandfather Father Son A popular backup scheme p 229 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 228 size and the number of recovery points p 238 available from the archive GFS enables recovering with daily resolution for the last several days weekly resolution for the last several weeks and monthly resolution for any time in the past For more information please
322. ready to ship You can now ship the media Step 1 Package the media following the drive packaging and shipment instructions p 212 to avoid damage during shipment If you want the media to be returned to you after the data is uploaded prepare a prepaid return shipping label and place it inside the package together with the drive Step 2 Send the drive via your preferred carrier to the Acronis datacenter Step 3 Let us know when you have shipped the order by marking your order as shipped You will receive a notification message when Acronis receives the order and when the order is completed If necessary Acronis may contact you during order processing Occasional Backup creation error An error occurred when backing up Please check the backup plan parameters and try again The media has been shipped This status is set after you mark the order as shipped The media has been received by Acronis Acronis has started processing your order From this point on you cannot cancel the order Creating a new initial seeding backup will require a new Initial Seeding license The data upload has started The process of uploading data to Acronis Online Backup Storage has started The data upload has been completed The initial full backup has been successfully uploaded to the online storage You can do incremental online backups now The order has been completed The media has been returned or Returning the m
323. red lt login gt tag Then the imported or deployed plan will use credentials of the agent service Example To make the backup plan run under the agent s credentials find the lt login gt tag in the lt plan gt lt options gt lt common_parameters gt section The tag looks like follows lt login gt Administrator lt login gt lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt Delete the value of the lt login gt tag so that the tag looks like follows lt login gt lt login gt lt password encrypted true gt XXXYYYZZZ888 lt password gt How to change items to back up Replacing a directly specified item with another directly specified item Inside the lt plan gt lt targets gt lt inclusions gt section 1 Delete the lt ID gt tag 2 Edit the value of the lt Path gt tag which contains information about data to back up for example replace C with D Replacing a directly specified item with a selection template Inside the lt plan gt lt options gt lt specific gt lt inclusion_rules gt section 1 Add the lt rules_type gt tag with disks or files value depending on the type of the template you need Add the lt rules gt tag Inside the lt rules gt tag add the lt rule gt with the required template The template must correspond to the directly specified item For example if the specified item has the disks value you can use the SYSTEM BOOT and Fixed Volu
324. ription individually What does Auto renew mean Auto renewal means that when the current subscription expires the next subscription will be automatically selected from the available subscriptions The next subscription must be identical to the current subscription If an identical subscription is not found auto renewal will not take place and your backups may fail No subscriptions will be bought automatically Only those subscriptions available at the time of auto renewal can be used You can select auto renewal for each individual subscription or set up bulk auto renewal of all of the activated subscriptions you have 11 1 8 6 How do I increase a storage quota for a machine Replace the subscription assigned to the machine with another subscription that has a larger storage quota The new subscription has the same type as the old one For example you can replace a workstation subscription only with another workstation subscription with a larger quota The storage quota increase is free of charge After the completion the operation cannot be reverted The new subscription will have a lesser subscription period It is calculated in the following way Pn Po Qo Qn where Pn new subscription remaining period Po old subscription remaining period Qo old subscription storage quota Qn new subscription storage quota Example You have a 250 GB subscription and you decide to increase its storage quota 2 months before
325. rivers can help you access the device where the backup archive is located Also you will be able to point to these drivers when configuring Universal Restore WinPE itself needs 32 bit drivers For using Universal Restore on a 64 bit system add 64 bit drivers as well Click Add and specify the path to the necessary inf file for a corresponding SCSI RAID SATA controller network adapter tape drive or other device You will have to repeat this procedure for each driver you want to be included in the resulting WinPE boot media 6 Choose whether you want to create ISO or WIM image or upload the media on a server Acronis PXE Server WDS or RIS 7 Specify the full path to the resulting image file including the file name or specify the server and provide the user name and password to access it Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 starts automatically To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly created WIM file For the above example type copy c AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim use the Oscdimg tool For the above example type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso For more information on customizing Windows PE s
326. rivers that you explicitly specify from the media This is necessary when the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fiber Channel adapter for the hard disk For more information please refer to Universal Restore The drivers will be placed in the visible Drivers folder on the bootable media The drivers are not loaded into the target machine RAM therefore the media must stay inserted or connected throughout the Universal Restore operation Adding drivers to bootable media is available on the condition that 1 The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Universal Restore add on is installed on the machine where the bootable media is created AND 2 You are creating a removable media or its ISO or detachable media such as a flash drive Drivers cannot be uploaded on a PXE server or WDS RIS The drivers can be added to the list only in groups by adding the INF files or folders containing such files Selecting individual drivers from the INF files is not possible but the media builder shows the file content for your information To add drivers 1 Click Add and browse to the INF file or a folder that contains INF files 2 Select the INF file or the folder 3 Click OK The drivers can be removed from the list only in groups by removing INF files To remove drivers 1 Select the INF file 2 Click Remove 8 1 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to
327. rk as active in the context menu If there is no other active volume in the system the pending operation of setting active volume will be added Please note that due to setting the new active volume the former active volume letter might be changed and some of the installed programs might stop running 3 If another active volume is present in the system you will receive the warning that the previous active volume will have to be set passive first By clicking OK in the Warning window you ll add the pending operation of setting active volume Please note even if you have the Operating System on the new active volume in some cases the machine will not be able to boot from it You will have to confirm your decision to set the new volume as active To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 187 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 9 7 4 Change volume letter Windows operating systems assign letters C D etc to hard disk volumes at startup These letters are used by applications and operating systems to locate files and folders in the volumes Connecting an additional disk as well as creating or deleting a volume on existing disks might change your system configuration As a result some applications might stop working normally or user files might
328. ronis Plug in for WinPE that is a modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent that can run in the preinstallation environment WinPE proved to be the most convenient bootable solution in large environments with heterogeneous hardware Advantages Using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 in Windows Preinstallation Environment provides more functionality than using Linux based bootable media Having booted PC compatible hardware into WinPE you can use not only Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent but also PE commands and scripts and other plug ins you ve added to the PE PE based bootable media helps overcome some Linux related bootable media issues such as support for certain RAID controllers or certain levels of RAID arrays only Media based on PE 2 x that is Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 kernel allows for dynamic loading of the necessary device drivers Limitation PE based bootable media does not support UEFI 8 1 How to create bootable media To enable creating physical media the machine must have a CD DVD recording drive or allow a flash drive to be attached To enable PXE or WDS RIS configuration the machine must have a network connection Bootable Media Builder can also create an ISO image of a bootable disk to burn it later ona blank disk Linux based bootable media Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate c
329. ronisTag label lt string gt A user defined label The label can be set by a user when creating a backup plan acronisTag hostname lt string gt Host name FQDN acronisTag os type lt string gt Operating system acronisTag os servicepack O 1 2 The version of the Service Pack installed in the system For Windows OS only acronisTag os sid lt string gt Machine s SID For example S 1 5 21 874133492 782267321 3928949834 For Windows OS only Values of the acronisTag os type parameter Windows NT 4 winNTGuest Windows 2000 Professional win2000ProGuest Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows XP All Editions Windows XP All Editions 64 bit Windows Server 2003 All Editions Windows Server 2003 All Editions 64 bit Windows 2008 Windows 2008 64 bit Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Linux Linux 64 bit Other Operating System Other Operating System 64 bit Example win2000ServGuest win2000ServGuest winXPProGuest winXPPro64Guest winNetStandardGuest winNetStandard64Guest winLonghornGuest winLonghorn64Guest winVistaGuest winVista64Guest windows7Guest windows7_64Guest windows 7Server64Guest otherLinuxGuest otherLinux64Guest otherGuest otherGuest64 acronisTag label DEPT BUCH COMP SUPERSERVER OWNER EJONSON acronisTag hostname superserver corp local acronisTag os t
330. rt doing incremental backups as soon as possible The data is generally available the next business day after the data center receives it 2 Shipping label for returning your hard drive Put this label in the box When returning your hard drive we will reuse the same packaging unless it is damaged If you do not enclose the label your drive will be securely discarded You might want to use the most cost efficient delivery method for having your hard drive returned Step 5 Securely seal the box with a sturdy tape Then stick the shipping label for sending your hard drive to the top of the box so the label does not wrap around the edge of the package 11 1 6 10 How do I track an Initial Seeding order status On the Acronis Web site the Initial Seeding Recovery tab shows you the status of all your orders In addition you will receive e mail notifications about the most important events Available The license is available for using on any machine An order was created The backup is about to start and the license cannot be used for the same or any other machine From this point on you can cancel the order if something goes wrong This will return the license to the pool of available licenses A full backup has started This status is set when the first backup starts The order start time occurs at this moment A full backup has been successfully completed The backup has been completed and the order is
331. rted as is will have the original name if no disk group exists on the machine For more information about disk groups please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article 222189 Description of Disk Groups in Windows Disk Management http support microsoft com kb 222189 EN US Dynamic disk A hard disk managed by Logical Disk Manager LDM that is available in Windows starting with Windows 2000 LDM helps flexibly allocate volumes on a storage device for better fault tolerance better performance or larger volume size A dynamic disk can use either the master boot record MBR or GUID partition table GPT partition style In addition to MBR or GPT each dynamic disk has a hidden database where the LDM stores the dynamic volumes configuration Each dynamic disk holds the complete information about all dynamic volumes existing in the disk group which makes for better storage reliability The database occupies the last 1MB of an MBR disk On a GPT disk Windows creates the dedicated LDM Metadata partition taking space from the Microsoft Reserved Partition MSR Disk 1 LDM databas Disk 2 Protec GpT Microsoft LDM tive Reserved database MBR Partition MSR LDM Metadata partition _ ee 1 MB Dynamic disks organized on MBR Disk 1 and GPT Disk 2 disks For more information about dynamic disks please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base articles Disk Management Windows XP Professional Resourc
332. rules Manual start to create a backup task for manual start OR schedule one time task execution in the future Initial seeding to save locally a full backup whose final destination is Acronis Online Backup Storage 4 2 5 1 Simple scheme With the simple backup scheme you just schedule when and how often to back up data Other steps are optional To set up the simple backup scheme specify the appropriate settings as follows Schedule Set up when and how often to back up the data To learn more about setting up the schedule see the Scheduling p 53 section Retention rules Specify how long to store backups in the location and whether to move or delete them afterward The retention rules are applied after creating a backup The Keep backups indefinitely is set by default which means that no backups will be deleted automatically For more information about retention rules see Setting up retention of backups p 68 Backup type To access this setting click Show backup type 2nd location validation convert to virtual machine Select the backup type Full selected by default for all backup locations except for Acronis Online Backup Storage Incremental At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental Selected as the one and only backup type for Acronis Online Backup Storage Note When the Incremental backup type is selected along with retention rules the archive w
333. ry 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Thursday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM Friday twice at 12 PM and 9 PM i e same as on Monday Saturday once at 9 PM Sunday once at 9 PM Combining the identical times the following three schedules can be added to the task First schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Mon Fri 2 Every 9 hours From 12 00 00 PM Until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Second schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Tue Wed Thu 2 Every 3 hours From 09 00 00 AM until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Third schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Sat Sun 2 Once at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set 4 4 3 Monthly schedule Monthly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a monthly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Months lt gt Select a certain month s you want to run the task in Days lt gt Select specific days of the month to run the task on You can also select the last day of the month irrespective of its actual date On lt gt lt gt Select specific days of the weeks to run the task on In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For ex
334. ry 30 seconds After five unsuccessful attempts the backup or recovery task will fail You can change the number of attempts and the interval between the attempts in the Error handling gt Re attempt if an error occurs option Every backup plan or recovery task includes this option 11 1 5 5 What happens if I run out of space When a machine s backups are about to exceed the storage space allowed by its subscription you receive an e mail notification with an alert In addition you can see this alert on the account management web page near the machine This means you have to free some space for future backups Or you can consider increasing the storage quota p 219 You may also want to set or edit the retention rule p 209 so that an overflow does not occur in future Once the occupied space reaches the limit the backups will cease to run 11 1 5 6 What is the cleanup task for Any backup plan where the retention rule is set contains a cleanup task in addition to a backup task The cleanup task checks the archive created by the backup plan for backups that have outlived their lifetime If such backups are found the task makes the online storage delete them Since the deletion is performed on the online storage side it does not take your machine s CPU resource The cleanup task runs after every online backup even if the backup has failed The last successful backup is always kept though For more information about the retention rule pl
335. s described in the How the automatic mapping works p 105 section If you are unsatisfied with the mapping result you can re map volumes manually To do this you have to unmap the volumes in a reverse order that is the last mapped volume should be unmapped first Then map the volumes manually as described below Recover Disk MBR to If the Master Boot Record is selected for recovery Disk p 107 Choose the disk to recover the Master Boot Record to NT signature p 104 Select the way the disk s signature contained in the MBR will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Recover Volume Letter to Disk Volume Sequentially map each of the source volumes to a volume or an unallocated space on the destination disk Size p 107 Optional Change the recovered volume size location and other properties MBR destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select the disk to recover the MBR to 2 Click OK Volume destination To specify a target volume or unallocated space 1 Select a volume or unallocated space where you want the selected volume to be recovered to The destination volume unallocated space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target volume will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need When using
336. s p 239 existing on the machines creating and managing centralized vaults p 231 for storing archives managing storage nodes p 239 monitoring activities of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 components creating reports viewing the centralized log and more Centralized task A task p 239 propagated to a machine from the management server p 237 Such task can be modified only by editing the original task or centralized backup plan p 230 on the management server Centralized vault A networked location allotted by the management server p 237 administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives p 228 A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node p 239 or be unmanaged The total number and size of archives stored in a centralized vault are limited by the storage size only As soon as the management server administrator creates a centralized vault the vault name and path to the vault are distributed to all machines registered p 238 on the server The shortcut to the vault appears on the machines in the Vaults list Any backup plan p 229 existing on the machines including local plans can use the centralized vault On a machine that is not registered on the management server a user having the privilege to back up to the centralized vault can do so by specifying the full path to the vault If the vault is managed the user s archives will be managed by the storage node as well as other archiv
337. s see the Users privileges on a managed machine p 22 section 4 2 9 Label Preserving machine properties in a backup Any time data on a machine is backed up information about the machine name operating system Windows service pack and security identifier SID is added to the backup along with the user defined text label The label may include the department or machine owner s name or similar information that can be used as a tag or a key If you recover p 97 the machine to a VMware ESX i using Agent for ESX i or convert p 72 the backup to a ESX i virtual machine these properties will be transferred to the virtual machine s configuration You can view them in the virtual machine settings Edit settings gt Options gt Advanced gt General gt Configuration parameters You can select sort and group the virtual machines with the help of these custom parameters This can be useful in various scenarios Example Let s assume you migrate your office or datacenter to a virtual environment By using third party software that can access configuration parameters through VMware API you can automatically apply security policies to each machine even before powering it on To add a text label to a backup 1 On the Create backup plan p 29 page click Show plan s credentials comments label 2 In Label enter the text label or select it from the drop down menu Parameters specification Parameter Value Description ac
338. s with the sector by sector option turned off a disk or volume backup stores only those sectors that contain data This reduces the resulting backup size and speeds up the backup and recovery operations Windows The swap file pagefile sys and the file that keeps the RAM content when the machine goes into hibernation hiberfil sys are not backed up After recovery the files will be re created in the appropriate place with the zero size A volume backup stores all other files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes including hidden and system files the boot record the file allocation table FAT if it exists the root and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR The boot code of GPT volumes is not backed up A disk backup stores all volumes of the selected disk including hidden volumes such as the vendor s maintenance partitions and the zero track with the master boot record Linux A volume backup stores all files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes a boot record and the file system super block A disk backup stores all disk volumes as well as the zero track with the master boot record 3 5 Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows This section explains in brief how to back up and recover dynamic volumes p 234 using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 A dynamic volume is a volume located on dynamic disks p 233 or more exactly on a
339. s and tasks The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup plans and tasks Restrictions Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot run or modify plans or tasks owned by other users t is not possible to modify or delete a currently running backup plan or task Acentralized backup plan or task can be modified or deleted only on the management server side To Do Create a new backup plan click J New then select one of the following or task Backup plan p 29 Recovery task p 97 Validation task p 143 To View details of a plan task View plan s task s log Run a plan task Stop a plan task Do Click Q Details In the respective Plan Details p 197 or Task Details p 198 window review the plan or task details Click i Log You will be taken to the Log p 199 view containing the list of the log entries grouped by the plan task related activities Backup plan 1 Click gt Run 2 In the drop down list select the plan s task you need run Running the backup plan starts the selected task of that plan immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Task Click Run The task will be executed immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Click W Stop Backup plan Stopping the running backup plan stops all its tasks Thus all the task operations will be aborted Task Stopping a task aborts its operation recovery
340. s of events to be sent For detailed information about using SNMP with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 please see Support for SNMP p 28 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the backup operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options Send SNMP notifications individually for backup operation events to send the events of the backup operations to the specified SNMP managers Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running the SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the backup operations to SNMP managers 4 7 9 2 Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log eve
341. s see Using the management console p 13 pa Ke Step 3 Bootable media To be able to recover an operating system that fails to start or deploy it on bare metal create bootable media 1 Select 26 Tools gt To Create bootable media in the menu 2 Click Next in the welcome screen Keep clicking Next until the list of components appears 3 Proceed as described in Linux based bootable media p 161 SS Step 4 Backup amp Back up now p 29 Click Back up now to do a one time backup in a few simple steps The backup process will start immediately after you perform the required steps To save your machine to a file Under Where to back up click Location and select the location where the backup will be saved Click OK to confirm your selection Click OK at the bottom of the window to start the backup Tip Using the bootable media you can do off line cold backups in the same way as in the operating system Create backup plan p 29 Create a backup plan if you need a long term backup strategy including backup schemes schedules and conditions timely deleting of backups or moving them to different locations 4 Step 5 Recovery S Recover p 97 To recover data you need to select the backed up data and the destination the data will be recovered to As a result a recovery task will be created Recovery of a disk or volume over a volume locked by the operating system requires a reboot After th
342. s to online from the Operations menu If the disk has the offline status and the disk s name is Missing this means that the disk cannot be located or identified by the operating system It may be corrupted disconnected or powered off For information on how to bring a disk that is offline and missing back online please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article http technet microsoft com en us library cc732026 aspx 9 7 Volume operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on volumes Create Volume p 180 Creates a new volume with the help of the Create Volume Wizard Delete Volume p 184 Deletes the selected volume Set Active p 185 Sets the selected volume Active so that the machine will be able to boot with the OS installed there Change Letter p 185 Changes the selected volume letter Change Label p 186 Changes the selected volume label Format Volume p 186 Formats a volume giving it the necessary file system The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with volumes Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target volume This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the volume cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this volume and
343. s view to examine information on operations performed by the program on the managed machine m 2 Mounted images This node is displayed if at least one volume is mounted Use this view to manage mounted images Shortcuts bar The Shortcuts bar appears under the navigation tree It offers you an easy and convenient way of connection to the machines in demand by adding them as shortcuts To add a shortcut to a machine 1 Connect the console to a managed machine 2 Inthe navigation tree right click the machine s name a root element of the navigation tree and then select Create shortcut If the console and agent are installed on the same machine the shortcut to this machine will be added to the shortcuts bar automatically as Local machine Machine name Operations with pane How to expand minimize panes By default the Navigation pane appears expanded You might need to minimize the pane in order to free some additional workspace To do this click the chevron h The pane will be minimized and the chevron changes its direction 2 Click the chevron once again to expand the pane How to change the panes borders 1 Point to the pane s border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the pointer to move the border 2 1 2 Main area views and action pages The main area is a basic place where you work with the console Here you create edit and manage backup plans recovery tasks and perform other operations The main are
344. saeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeesaeeeseeeens 141 Operations with archives and DackupS cccccccccccsssssscccsccscsccscsssscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssess 143 74 Validating archives and DaCkUPS cccssccccccccccseeeeseeeceeeeeseeesseeeeceeeessaaeaseeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeseess 143 71S amp Archive selectioniis narenn aen aiaia ia ina tinned ahaa dia nent 144 7 42 Backup SELE CLIO gress Hess e sages a aaa ra a hans ro ar pede paca aaa gabe seca pate a aod saan pale yah pee Te 144 7 4 3 Vat SCIOCTION nesir sees ceveese seescusedivs ceeseveenis resale nisedieatairdcediaiidieaeciiredoliavadiedialidieees 144 LLA Access credentials TOF SOURCE ovis Sie St A olla a aai 145 TL5 When to Validate tic cscciencii ck an kiddin ni aia a ia Md aaa 145 ALG TASK ChEGEN IAS ses csihes seietesides edetid Soend a a a aaae 146 7 2 Exporting archives and backups 2 4280 c8n8 ae dnanen a cA wena A WA eo 146 AXI Archive SelectiOnwvasiedi ai tin aAA die at delites edit ael tia vate ain lie atadelitv ascetics 149 TAA Ba kU 0 04 OT ae a a a a a ea a 149 7 2 3 Access credentials for SOUrCe cccescesceseeseescescesesseeseeseesecsecsecsecseesecsecsecsecaeesecsecaecsecseesesaeenssaesaesaesaess 149 72A DestinationSsel ctioNi ansann ann nannaa an anaa a anaia 150 7 2 5 Access credentials for destination seessessesesrsessesesersssesesessesesesessssesesossesesesonsesesesoseesesesosseseseseseese 151 7 3 Mounting AN i Mage eesssssssss
345. sbin grub Specify the disk on which GRUB is located typically the boot or root partition root hd Install GRUB For example to install GRUB in the master boot record MBR of the first disk run the following command setup hd Exit the GRUB shell quit Unmount the mounted file systems and then reboot umount mnt system dev umount mnt system proc umount mnt system boot umount mnt system reboot 13 Reconfigure the bootloader by using tools and documentation from the Linux distribution that you use For example in Debian and Ubuntu you may need to edit some commented lines in the boot grub menu st file and then run the update grub script otherwise the changes might not take effect 5 6 2 About Windows loaders Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files ntldr boot ini ntdetect com ntbootdd sys boot ini is a text file that contains the loader configuration Example boot loader timeout 30 default multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS operating systems multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute optin fastdetect Windows Vista 2008 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files bootmgr boot bcd At starting Windows boot bcd is mounted to the registry key HKLM BCD00000000 5 7 Default recovery options Each Acronis agent has its own def
346. scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 6 00 PM the time when the condition is met If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is selected with say the 1 Hour waiting time the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 4 00 PM the time when the waiting period ends 4 4 6 4 User logged off Applies to Windows Enables to put a backup task run on hold until all users log off from Windows on the managed machine Example Run the backup task at 8 PM on the first and third Friday of every month preferably when all users are logged off If one of the users is still logged on at 11 PM run the task anyway Event Monthly Months lt All gt On lt First gt lt Third gt lt Friday gt Once at 08 00 00 PM Condition User logged off Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 3 hour s As a result 1 If all users are logged off at 8PM the backup task will start at 8PM 2 If the last user logs off between 8PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user has logged off 3 If any of the users is still logged on at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 4 4 6 5 Time since last backup Applies to Windows Linux Enables to put a backup task run on hold until the specified time interval since the last successful backup completion passes Example Run the backup task at sys
347. secsescseceseceaecaesesseeseenses 46 4 2 9 Label Preserving machine properties in a DACKUP cscsscseeseeeseeseesecseesscaessessecseeseesessesaesaesaesaeses 47 4 2 10 Why is the program asking for the password csccsceseesseseeeeseeseeseeseeseesecaecaeeseesecseesecaesaesaesaesaesaesaesas 48 4 3 Simplified naming of backup files cccccccccssssseseeceeeeeceaaeesseeceeeecsauaeeeeceeeeeesuuaaeeeeeeeeesaas 48 4 3 1 Usage Cxarmples cccsccscsscsscsscsscsscssssscssessessssssssssesssecsssessaecaeseesaesaesaseassassaeeaesaesaesaecaseaesaesaseaesaseaseaeeaeeas 4 3 2 The DATE variable 4 3 3 Backup splitting and simplified file naming ccseseeseeseeseeseeseesesseeeessessecsecaecsecaessesaesaesaesaesaesaesaeegs 52 4 4 SCHECUIING ec eeeececcccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeessseaeuseeeeeeessaaaaaseseeeeeesaas 53 4 4 1 Daily SCHECUI eee eee ccccsccesccscesseessccsecsscesscesecseesssessecsecssscsessscssecssssscssecsescsecsscseseaeceseceecaeceaeceaeenees 54 AAD Weekly Schedule ssesiizsiissseceideecanssdesatierterdivaevidirineatirinaredivnien sina vitivivarestvnenviinenteniiinendirentdlveedes 56 4A3 Monthly schedulers ennet Gkek Gish Ghia RHEE WaRGRAR GHEE RAR REAM 58 4 4 4 At Windows Event Log CVeNt ccccccscccsscessecssssesssecsseecsseecsseeseecssesseseeceseesaecesuscessecesseseaseseaeessaeeeseees 60 4 4 5 Upon an Acronis Drive Monitor alert ccccccccs
348. sed alerts To find and fix the issue that caused the alert click Fix the issue You will be taken to the corresponding view where you can examine the issue and take the necessary steps to resolve it Optionally you can click View details to get more information about the alert you select Accepting alerts By default the Current alerts table lists both active and inactive alerts until they are not accepted To accept an alert select it and then click Accept By accepting an alert you acknowledge the alert and agree to takeresponsibility for it The accepted alerts are then moved to the Accepted alerts table with the alert state unchanged The Accepted alerts table stores the history of the accepted alerts Here you can find out who accepted the alert and when it happen The accepted alerts of both states can be removed from the table either manually by using Delete and Delete all buttons or automatically see Configuring alerts later in this section To export entire table contents to a txt or csv file click Save all to file Configuring alerts Use the following options at the top of the Alerts view to configure alerts Show hide alerts p 18 specify the alert types to display in the Alerts view Notifications p 203 set up e mail notifications about alerts Settings p 202 specify whether to move inactive alerts to the Accepted alerts table automatically set how long to keep the accepted alerts in the Ac
349. seeeeeceeecessuaeseeeeeeessssaaasseeeeeseessaaaaeeeeeess 13 2 1 1 Navigation Pane cccccsccscsscecscetsssssessscsecssssscsecsessecsessecsecsessecsecsecsecsecsecaesaecseesecaeeaecaecaseaesaeeaseaeeaes 14 2 1 2 Main area views and action PAGeS cccsccsseceeeseceeeeeseceeeeseceeeceeesseceaeceeeaeeeaeseeeseceueseseaeseaeseeeseesaeeaes 15 231 3 COMSOIE OPI OMS esseere Ses sseees shekesdcvs dua oasaieed tees debs vdssiasiaassiasdis vaca vd cans Gad sins dard tees asdaa vida ia a anarie 18 3 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 cccccccssssssssssssssssssssscccccccccsscscsssssessssssessees 21 3 1 Owners and credentials 5 25 se sc 20c cacseacsdanassaadanadanadecadadaiecadadadasadadadasadadadadadadadadaiaiadanianagaaatid 21 3 2 User privileges on a managed machine ssssssssssreerresssssrrrrrrrssssssrrrrrrsssssnrerrrsssssssreerenne 22 3 3 Full incremental and differential DaCKUPS cssesseeceeeeccseeesseeecceeessaeaesseeeeeeeeessaaasseseeess 22 3 4 What does a disk or volume backup store csssssesseccececceeeeseseeeceeessueaeseeeeeeeeessaaaseeeeeess 24 3 5 Backup and recovery of dynamic volumes Windows cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeess 25 3 6 Compatibility with encryption software sssssssrsensesssssrrrrrrrsssssnrrrrrnnssssnnnrrrensssnnreerenne 26 3 7 S pp rt f r SNMP ics cats sais secesees cade aes ccaec0tesawt eae vecee eeaaw eae vecea ceaawt anes vecee
350. send notification when the backup operation is completed successfully When backup fails to send notification when the backup operation is failed When user interaction is required to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required Click Send test WinPopup message to check if the settings are correct 4 7 17 Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when pre post commands are executed Pre backup ackt Post backup command command Examples of how you can use the pre post commands Delete some temporary files from the disk before starting backup Configure a third party antivirus product to be started each time before the backup starts Copy an archive to another location after the backup ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the backup Execute after the backup 2 Doany ofthe following Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK 4 7 17 1 Pre backup command To specify a command batch file t
351. share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device When operating on a machine booted with bootable media To access a managed vault type the following string in the Path field bsp node_address vault_name To access an unmanaged centralized vault type the full path to the vault s folder In the table to the rig
352. siness This is your account management Web page Here you can get a trial subscription locate an Acronis partner or buy subscriptions online The newly obtained subscriptions are listed as available subscriptions in the Manage Subscriptions tab If you purchased your subscriptions from an Acronis partner register them manually using the Enter new registration code link The registration codes come with the purchase confirmation e mail Next install Acronis software if not yet installed and assign p 221 each subscription to a machine The subscriptions become activated After that you can start backing up to Acronis Online Backup Storage 11 3 Choosing a subscription Normally you choose a subscription based on the operating system your machine is running Server operating systems supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Windows 2000 SP4 all editions except for the Datacenter and Professional editions Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 the Standard Enterprise editions x86 x64 Windows Small Business Server 2003 2003 R2 Windows Server 2008 the Standard Enterprise editions x86 x64 Windows Small Business Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 the Standard Enterprise Datacenter Foundation editions Windows MultiPoint Server 2010 m Windows Small Business Server 2011 Workstation operating systems supported by Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online Windows 2000 Professional SP4 W
353. sks The Backup plans and tasks view keeps you informed of data protection on a given machine It lets you monitor and manage backup plans and tasks To find out what a backup plan is currently doing on the machine check the backup plan execution state p 190 A backup plan execution state is a cumulative state of the plan s most recent activities The status of a backup plan p 191 helps you to estimate whether the data is successfully protected To keep track of a task s current progress examine its state p 192 Check a task status p 192 to ascertain the result of a task Typical workflow Use filters to display the desired backup plans tasks in the backup plans table By default the table displays all the plans of the managed machine sorted by name You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones For details see Sorting filtering and configuring table items p 16 Inthe backup table select the backup plan task Use the toolbar s buttons to take an action on the selected plan task For details see Actions on backup plans and tasks p 188 To review detailed information on the selected plan task use the information panel at the bottom of the window The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the arrow mark The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Plan details p 197 and Task details p 198 windows respectively 10 1 1 Actions on backup plan
354. specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of weeks Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples One day in the week schedule Run the task every Friday at 10PM starting from a certain date say 05 14 2009 and ending after six months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on Fri 2 Once at 10 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 05 13 2009 The task will be started on the nearest Friday at 10 PM To 11 13 2009 The task will be performed for the last time on this date but the task itself will still be available in the Tasks view after this date If this date were not a Friday the task would be last performed on the last Friday preceding this date This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The One day in the week like schedule is added to the full backups while the incremental backups are scheduled to be performed on workdays For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 39 section Workdays schedule Run the task every week on workdays
355. ssssersssrersssrrrsssrrsssrrrsssrrrssrrrrsssrrnssrrrssserrsssrerssseensseeresseeesseeene 151 73 1 Archive selettio m dso tana aA eE ET a AE Ea TEE EANA E teh EA EE i 152 32 BACKUP SElECtON ninkin henereisie iioa U aaea OT a NE a TAA da A aaaea TAALA aea Ea teat 153 Laa Access eredential Sainan haa aiaa a a a a ous a a a a a a aia a 154 734 Nollime selection acincicdeaindadadaiiniininiadedtvdintedinia deity dinteiniladndtaiintedinitniealas 154 7 3 5 Managing mounted iMages ccesccsccssccesccseceseeeecseeeeceseceeesseceseceeecseceseceesseseseceecseseaeceeesieeeseseneeseees 154 7 4 Operations available in vaults ccccccecesscecccccccceeeesseeecceccessaeeseeeeceeeessseasseeeeeesessagaeeeseees 155 7 4 1 Operations With archives ccccccccsscssscsscesscesscsseesecssscsssesecssecsscesscssscsesesscssecsesesscsecsesesecesecesesseeaeenees 155 TAi2 Operations With DaCkuUpPSie ccscecedssatvssdencdescdssceaises ssabacshanesusabetsjaceyecadieshesiena coassstbacs ansbencveacaesevevevesszess 156 7 4 3 Converting a back p to full cccccscsccscvsesecvveessscneseect eecrcsadteccderesscetecieescuadetecsaeivseddeviactesatssesseeneceactans 157 7 4 4 Deleting archives and backups cccscsscsscsscescesessecseeseesecsecsecseeseeseeseesecsecsecsessecsessecsecsecseesecaesaesaesaees 157 Bootable media eeeceeecerc cere cee cee AAAA ENE Aa Eea A AA a Aa AA a AA EAA AA EAEE EAE EREE ERANA REREN 159 8 1 Howto create bootable medido n ccccccecccceccs
356. stitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt To exclude a folder specified by a path containing the drive letter add a backslash to the folder name in the criterion for example C Finance Exclusion examples on ae ae Windows and Linux By name F log Excludes all files named F log F Excludes all folders named F By mask log Excludes all files with the log extension Ee Excludes all files and folders with names starting with F such as folders F F1 and files F log F1 log By mask F log Excludes all log files with names consisting of four symbols and starting with F By file path C Finance F log Excludes the file named F log located in the folder C Finance By folder path C Finance F Excludes the folder C Finance F be sure to specify the full path starting from the disk letter Linux By file path home user Finance F log Excludes the file named F log located in the folder home user Finance By folder path home user Finance Excludes the folder home user Finance The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for backup For example assume that you selected the folde
357. storage you need to buy a subscription p 220 to the online backup service and activate p 221 the subscription on the machine s you want to back up Online backup is not available under bootable media Note Acronis Backup amp Recovery Online might be unavailable in your region To find more information click here http www acronis com my backup recovery online To back up data to a personal vault expand the Vaults group and click the vault Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users that can log on the system Local machine To back up data to the local folders of the machine expand the lt Machine name gt group and select the required folder To back up data to optical media such as CD or DVD expand the lt Machine name gt group then select the required drive To back up data to a locally attached tape device expand the lt Machine name gt group then click the required device Tape devices are available only if you have upgraded from Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 For information about using tapes see the Tape devices section of the product Help To back up data to the network folder expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Destination Details Q FTP SFTP To back up data to FTP or SFTP type the server name or address
358. sy recovery from this backup If you boot a machine from the media and click Run Acronis One click Restore the disk will be immediately recovered from the backup contained on the same media Caution Because the one click approach does not presume user selections such as selecting volumes to recover Acronis One Click Restore always recovers the entire disk If your disk contains several volumes and you are planning to use Acronis One Click Restore include all the volumes in the backup Any volumes missing from the backup will be lost 4 7 14 Mount points This option is effective only in Windows for a file level backup of a data source that includes mounted volumes or cluster shared volumes This option is effective only when you select for backup a folder that is higher in the folder hierarchy than the mount point A mount point is a folder on which an additional volume is logically attached If such folder a parent folder is selected for backup and the Mount points option is enabled all files located on the mounted volume will be included in the backup If the Mount points option is disabled the mount point in the backup will be empty During recovery of a parent folder the mount point content will or will not be recovered depending on whether the Mount points option for recovery p 130 is enabled or disabled If you select the mount point directly or select any folder within the mounted volume the selected folders wil
359. t of time The above mentioned difference implies creating a differential backup after or instead of creating multiple incremental backups An incremental or differential backup created after disk defragmentation might be considerably larger than usual because defragmentation changes file locations on the disk and the backup reflects these changes It is recommended that you re create a full backup after disk defragmentation The following table summarizes the advantages and shortcomings of each backup type as they appear based on common knowledge In real life these parameters depend on numerous factors such as the amount speed and pattern of data changes the nature of the data the physical specifications of the devices the backup recovery options you set to name a few Practice is the best guide to selecting the optimal backup scheme Parameter Full backup Differential backup Incremental backup Storage space Maximal Medium Minimal Creation time Maximal Medium Minimal Minimal Medium Maximal Recovery time 3 4 What does a disk or volume backup store A disk or volume backup stores a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all the information necessary for the operating system to boot It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well as individual folders or files With the sector by sector raw mode option enabled a disk backup stores all the disk sectors For supported file system
360. ta protection 4 3 1 6 Example 6 Backups within working hours Consider the following scenario You want to back up your server s critical files every day You want the first backup of each day to be full and to run at 01 00 AM You want the backups during working hours to be differential and to run every hour from 8 00 AM through 5 00 PM You want to include a creation date in the name of each backup file In this scenario you need to create two backup plans as follows a When creating the first backup plan specify ServerFiles DATE as the archive name select the Name backup files using the archive name check box select Full as the backup type and schedule the backups to run every day at 01 00 00 AM b When creating the second backup plan specify the same settings as in the first backup plan but select Differential as the backup type and schedule the backups as follows Run the task Daily Every 1 Hour s From 08 00 00 AM Until 05 01 00 PM Result The full backup of January 31 2011 will be stored as ServerFiles 1 31 2011 tib The 10 differential backups of January 31 2011 will be stored as ServerFiles 1 31 2011 2 tib ServerFiles 1 31 2011 3 tib and so on up to ServerFiles 1 31 2011 11 tib The following day February 1 the backups will start with the full backup ServerFiles 2 1 2011 tib The differential backups will start with ServerFiles 2 1 2011 2 tib See also The Date variabl
361. ta capture commands gt VSS Suspend gt Data capture gt VSS Resume gt After data capture commands Using the pre post data capture commands you can suspend and resume a database or application that is not compatible with VSS As opposed to the Pre Post commands p 90 the pre post data capture commands will be executed before and after the data capture process This takes seconds The entire backup procedure may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be backed up Therefore the database or application idle time will be minimal To specify pre post data capture commands 1 Enable pre post data capture commands execution by checking the following options Execute before the data capture Execute after the data capture Do any of the following m Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list Click OK 4 7 18 1 Pre data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed before data capture 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropr
362. task needs Identify the tasks that need interaction the program will user interaction display what action is needed gt Stop the tasks or enable the tasks to run change media provide additional space on the vault ignore the read error create the missing Acronis Secure Zone Otherwise see 2 At least one task is No action is required running Otherwise see 3 At least one task is Waiting for condition This situation is quite normal but waiting delaying a backup for too long is risky The solution may be to set the maximum delay p 94 after which the task will start anyway or force the condition tell the user to log off Otherwise see 4 enable the required network connection Waiting while another task locks the necessary resources A one time waiting case may occur when a task start is delayed or a task run lasts much longer than usual for some particular reason and prevents another task from starting This situation is resolved automatically when the obstructing task comes to an end Consider stopping a task if it hangs for too long to enable the next task to start Persistent task overlapping may result from an incorrectly scheduled plan or plans It makes sense to edit the plan in this case 10 1 2 2 Backup plan statuses A backup plan can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A backup plan status is derived from the results of the last run of the plans tasks activities At least
363. te The following types of volume are available m Basic Simple Spanned Striped Mirrored RAID 5 You will obtain a brief description of every type of volume for better understanding of the advantages and limitations of each possible volume architecture If the current operating system installed on this machine does not support the selected type of volume you will receive the appropriate warning In this case the Next button will be disabled and you will have to select another type of volume to proceed with the new volume creation After you click the Next button you will proceed forward to the next wizard page Select destination disks p 182 Select destination disks The next wizard page will prompt you to choose the disks whose space will be used for the volume creation To create a basic volume Select a destination disk and specify the unallocated space to create the basic volume on To create a Simple Spanned volume Select one or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a Mirrored volume Select two destination disks to create the volume on To create a Striped volume Select two or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a RAID 5 volume Select three destination disks to create the volume on After you choose the disks the wizard will calculate the maximum size of the resulting volume depending on the size of the unallocated space on the disks y
364. te a vault Click validate You will be taken to the Validation p 143 page where this vault is already pre selected as a source The vault validation checks all the archives stored in the vault Delete a vault Click x Delete The deleting operation actually removes only a shortcut to the folder from the Vaults view The folder itself remains untouched You have the option to keep or delete archives contained in the folder Refresh vault table Click G Refresh information While you are reviewing the vault content archives can be added to the vault deleted or modified Click Refresh to update the vault information with the most recent changes Creating a personal vault To create a personal vault 1 Inthe Name field type a name for the vault being created 2 Optional In the Comments field add a description of the vault 3 Click Path and specify a path to the folder that will be used as the vault A personal vault can be organized on a network share FTP server detachable media Acronis Online Backup Storage tape device or on a hard drive local to the machine 4 Optional If the vault is created on a tape device a Click Drives to specify the tape drive s to be used when backing up to the vault By default all available drives will be used Click Use the following drives only and select or clear required check boxes b Click Tape pool and specify the pool whose tapes will be used by the vault By default the
365. tem startup but only if more than 12 hours have passed since the last successful backup Event At startup Start the task on machine startup Condition Time since last backup Time since the last backup 12 hour s Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met As a result 1 if the machine is restarted before 12 hours pass since the completion of the latest successful backup the scheduler will wait until 12 hours pass and then will start the task 2 if the machine is restarted after 12 hours have passed since the completion of the latest successful backup the backup task will start immediately 3 if the machine is never restarted the task will never start You can start the backup manually if need be in the Backup plans and tasks view 4 5 Replication and retention of backups When creating a backup plan p 29 you specify the primary location for the backups In addition you can do the following Replicate copy each backup to a second location immediately after creation Retain the backups according to the retention rules you specify and then either move them to a second location or delete them Similarly you can copy or move backups from a second location to a third location and so on Up to five consecutive locations are supported including the primary one Note The replication feature replaces and enhances the Dual destination option which was available in Acronis Backup amp Rec
366. the fonts to be used in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 The Menu font setting affects the drop down and context menus The Application font setting affects all other GUI elements The preset is System Default font for both the menus and the application interface items To make a selection choose the font from the respective combo box and set the font s properties You can preview the font s appearance by clicking Browse to the right 2 1 3 4 Pop up messages These options are effective when the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server The Activities Need Interaction dialog This option defines whether to display a pop up window when one or more activities require user interaction This window enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on all the activities in the same place Until at least one activity requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s welcome screen Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the Backup plans and tasks view and specify your decision on each task in the information panel The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the The Activities Need Interaction dialog check box The Feedback Confirmation dialog This option defines whether to display a pop up window with the information about your system
367. the subscription expiration The new subscription storage quota is 500 GB So the new subscription remaining period will be Pn 2 months 250 GB 500 GB 1 month To increase a storage quota 1 Goto the account management Web page 2 Select the machine for which you want to increase a storage quota and then click Increase 3 If the existing subscription has the maximum available storage quota for this subscription type the software notifies you Otherwise select the new storage quota 4 Click Increase and then click OK to confirm the operation 11 1 8 7 What is the Group column for So you can apply actions such as Renew all or Auto renew all to your selection of the subscriptions Specify the desired group name for example SalesDept near each of the subscriptions you want to group Click the Group column header to sort the subscriptions and then apply the desired actions to the group 11 1 8 8 Can I revoke a subscription from a machine You cannot return an activated subscription to the list of available subscriptions but you can reassign p 222 it to a different machine in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 GUI 11 1 8 9 Can I cancel my subscription Just wait until the subscription expires Refunds are not available for the online backup subscriptions 11 2 Where do I start On the Acronis Web site log in to your account create one if you are not registered yet and navigate to Online backup gt For Bu
368. therwise packaging materials can be obtained at any shipping outlet or stationary store You should also include all necessary cables or adapters to the drive Acronis will not be able to process your initial seeding request if there are no cables included The following are instructions about how to package your hard disk drive Step 1 Delicately remove your hard disk drive from the machine Step 2 Place the hard drive into an anti static bag to protect the drive from electrostatic discharge If you do not have an anti static bag simply wrap the hard drive into aluminum foil Step 3 Use a sturdy box that is at least twice the size of the drive Pack the drive with a bubble wrap around all 6 sides so it can fit tight into the box and cannot be moved within DO NOT use Styrofoam peanuts for packing as they do not provide enough protection DO NOT send your media in jiffy bags 213 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2011 Step 4 Choose the transport company that you will use for shipping On that company s web site prepare and print two prepaid shipping labels 1 Shipping label for sending your hard drive This label is placed on the top of the box You should send your package to one of the Acronis data centers The data center address can be obtained on the Initial seeding Recovery tab of your account management page by clicking Datacenter address We recommend that you use overnight shipping if you want to sta
369. tings to default values Task credentials Optional The task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task account credentials if necessary To access this setting click Show task credentials Optional Universal Restore for Windows Linux Applies to system disk or volume recovery Using Acronis Universal Restore requires a separate license Universal Restore for Windows Linux p 112 Use Acronis Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up an operating systems on dissimilar hardware After you complete all the required steps click OK to create the commit creating of the recovery task 5 1 1 What to recover 1 Specifying the archive location In the Data path field specify the archive location path or click Browse and select the required location as described in Selecting archive location p 100 In the advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 you can select either to specify the archive location path as described above or use the centralized data catalog 2 Selecting data The backed up data can be selected using the Data view tab or the Archive view tab The Data view tab displays all the backed up data by versions the date and time of backup creation within the selected archive location The Archive view tab displays the backed up data by the archives Note File level recovery with Agent for ESX i or Agent for Hyper V is not possible Selecting
370. tion Use the following credentials The software will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 5 1 3 Access credentials for destination To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following Use the task credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials of the task account specified in the Task parameters section Use the following credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the destination Specify User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 5 1 4 Where to recover Specify the destinati
371. ts the kernel from freezing on some hardware nofw Disables the FireWire IEEE1394 interface support nopcmcia Disables detection of PCMCIA hardware nomouse Disables mouse support module_name off Disables the module whose name is given by module_name For example to disable the use of the SATA module specify sata_sis off pci bios Forces the use of PCI BIOS instead of accessing the hardware device directly You may want to use this parameter if the machine has a non standard PCI host bridge pci nobios Disables the use of PCI BIOS only direct hardware access methods will be allowed You may want to use this parameter when the bootable media fails to start which may be caused by the BIOS pci biosirq Uses PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table You may want to use this parameter if the kernel is unable to allocate interrupt requests IRQs or discover secondary PCI buses on the motherboard These calls might not work properly on some machines But this may be the only way to get the interrupt routing table 8 1 1 2 Network settings While creating Acronis bootable media you have an option to pre configure network connections that will be used by the bootable agent The following parameters can be pre configured P address Subnet mask Gateway DNS server WINS server Once the bootable agent starts on a machine the configuration is applied to the machine s network interface card NIC If the sett
372. tual machine If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Windows is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer Open Virtual Appliance OVA The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 122 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX i is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disks volumes Map automatically Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 attempts to map the selected volumes to the target disks a
373. ul backup completed The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 94 backup option What ifs What if an event occurs and a condition if any is met while the previous task run has not completed The event will be ignored What if an event occurs while the scheduler is waiting for the condition required by the previous event The event will be ignored What if the condition is not met for a very long time If delaying a backup is getting risky you can force the condition tell the users to log off or run the task manually To automatically handle this situation you can set the time interval after which the task will run regardless of the condition 4 4 1 Daily schedule Daily schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a daily schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt day s Set up the certain number of days you want the task to be run For example if you set Every 2 day s the task will be started on every other day In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be restarted during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 0
374. umber of levels In all other cases the scheme can be changed and should continue to operate as if existing archives were created by a new scheme For empty archives all changes are possible Clone a backup plan Click Ges Clone The clone of the original backup plan will be created with default name Clone of lt original_plan_name gt The cloned plan will be disabled immediately after cloning so that it does not run concurrently with the original plan You can edit the cloned plan settings before enabling it Enable a plan click Enable The previously disabled backup plan will run again as scheduled Disable a plan Click Disable The backup plan will not run as scheduled However it can be started manually After a manual run the plan will stay disabled The plan will run as usual if you enable it again Export a plan Click Export Specify the path and name of the resulting file See Export and import of backup plans p 193 for more information Import a plan Click A Import Specify the path and name of the file that contains a previously exported plan See Export and import of backup plans p 193 for more information Delete a plan task Click gt Delete 10 1 2 States and statuses of backup plans and tasks 10 1 2 1 Backup plan execution states A backup plan state is a cumulative state of the plan s tasks activities State How it is determined How to handle Need interaction At least one
375. umes table enabling data sorting and columns customization and toolbar The table presents the numbers of the disks as well as assigned letter label type capacity free space size used space size file system and status for each volume The toolbar comprises of icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations p 187 The graphic panel at the bottom of the view also graphically depicts all the disks and their volumes as rectangles with basic data on them label letter size status type and file system Both parts of the view also depict all unallocated disk space that can be used in volume creation Starting the operations Any operation can be launched From the volume or disk context menu both in the table and the graphic panel From the Disk management menu of the console From the Operations bar on the Actions and Tools pane Note that the list of available operations in the context menu the Disk management menu and the Operations bar depends on the selected volume or disk type The same is true for unallocated space as well Displaying operation results The results of any disk or volume operation you have just planned are immediately displayed in the Disk management view of the console For example if you create a volume it will be immediately shown in the table as well as in graphical form at the bottom of the view Any volume changes including changing the volume letter or
376. up Windows or Linux on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Universal Restore is not available when the image being recovered is located in Acronis Secure Zone p 227 or when using Acronis Active Restore p 227 because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Activity An action performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 for achievement of some user goal Examples backing up recovery exporting a backup cataloging a vault An activity may be initiated by a user or by the software itself Execution of a task p 239 always causes one or more activities Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Agent An application that performs data backup and recovery and enables other management operations on the machine p 236 such as task management and operations with hard disks The type of data that can be backed up depends on the agent type Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 includes the agents for backing up disks and files and the agents for backing up virtual machines residing on virtualization servers Archive See Backup archive p 228 B Backup A backup is the result of a single backup operation p 228 Physically it is a file or a tape record that contains a copy of the backed up data as of a specific date and t
377. use the operating system or applications to work unstably and even fail to start 6 2 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 240 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults Centralized backup plans can use Acronis Secure Zone as well as local plans All the archive management operations available in vaults are also applicable for Acronis Secure Zone To learn more about archive management operations see Operations with archives and backups p 155 6 2 2 1 Increasing Acronis Secure Zone To increase Acronis Secure Zone 1 Onthe Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Increase 2 Select volumes from which free space will be used to increase the Acronis Secure Zone 3 Specify the new size of the zone by dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and maximum values The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space of all selected partitions typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field When increasing the size of the zone the program will act as follows m first it will use the unallocated space Volumes will be moved if necessary but not resized Moving of locked volumes requires a reboot If there is not enough unallocated space the program will take free space from the selected volumes proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked
378. validation exporting conversion etc The task enters the Idle state The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task over again What will happen if I stop the recovery task Recovering disks the aborted operation may cause changes in the target disk Depending on the time that has passed since the task run the target disk may not be initialized or the disk space may be unallocated or some volumes may be recovered and others not To recover the entire disk run the task once again m Recovering volumes the target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated the same result you will get if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume run the task once again Recovering files or folders the aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Depending on the time that has passed since the task run some files may be recovered but some not To recover all the files run the task once again To Do Edit a plan task Click Edit Backup plan editing is performed in the same way as creation p 29 except for the following limitations It is not always possible to use all scheme options when editing a backup plan if the created archive is not empty i e contains backups 1 Itis not possible to change the scheme to Grandfather Father Son or Tower of Hanoi 2 If the Tower of Hanoi scheme is used it is not possible to change the n
379. value Depending on the view you can filter a table items by some predefined parameters To do this click the respective buttons or links at the top of the table For example In the Log view you can filter the event entries by clicking buttons associated with the result Succeeded Succeeded with warnings or Failed The Log view has the activity start time as the default parameter and three predefined settings for filtering activities by this parameter All available For last 3 months or For custom period are placed at the top of the Log view By default any table has a fixed number of columns that are shown others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Action pages An action page appears in the main area when clicking any action item in the Actions menu It contains steps you need to perform in order to create and launch any task or a backup plan Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Connected to This Machine Local Connection as Administrator MACHINE14 E 5 xj E je Q Connect Actions GE Tools M Navigation Optons Hep 4 Acronis apan Create backup plan Show shortlist O Create 2 backup plan to protect data on the selected machine al Machine14 ru corp acronis c 4 Vaults What to back up PS centralized B am
380. vaults are specific for each managed machine Personal vaults are visible to any user that can log on to the system A user s right to back up to a personal vault is defined by the user s permission for the folder or device where the vault is located A personal vault can be organized on a network share FTP server detachable media or removable Acronis Online Backup Storage tape device or on a hard drive local to the machine Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users that can log on the system Personal vaults are created automatically when backing up any of the above locations Personal vaults can be used by local backup plans or local tasks Centralized backup plans cannot use personal vaults except for Acronis Secure Zone Sharing a personal vault Multiple machines can refer to the same physical location for example to the same shared folder However each of the machines has its own shortcut in the Vaults tree Users that back up toa shared folder can see and manage each other s archives according to their access permissions for that folder To ease archive identification the Personal vault view has the Owner column that displays the owner of each archive To find out more about the owner concept see Owners and credentials p 21 Metadata The meta folder is created during backup in every personal vault This folder contains additional information about archives and backups stored in the vault such
381. ve and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 7 4 2 Operations with backups To perform any operation with an archive 1 Inthe Navigation pane select the vault that contains archives 2 On the Archive view tab of the vault select the archive Then expand the archive and click the backup to select it If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it 3 Perform operations by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can also be accessed from the Backup name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backups To View backup content in a separate window Recover Convert a disk volume backup to a virtual machine Validate a backup Export a backup Convert a backup to full Do Click A View content In the Backup Content window examine the backup content Click Recover The Recover data p 97 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Right click the disk backup then select Convert to VM The Recover data p 97 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Select the location and the type of new virtual machine and then proceed as with regular disk or volume recovery Click if Validate The Validation p 143 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Validation of a file backup imitates rec
382. ver The drivers defined here will be installed with appropriate warnings even if the program finds a better driver The recovery process If Universal Restore cannot find a compatible driver in the specified locations it will display a prompt with the problem device Do any of the following Add the driver to any of the previously specified locations and click Retry fyou do not remember the location continue the recovery If the result is not satisfactory start Universal Restore without recovery by clicking Apply Universal Restore in the media welcome screen When configuring the operation specify the necessary driver Once Windows boots it will initialize the standard procedure for installing new hardware The network adapter driver will be installed silently if the driver has the Microsoft Windows signature Otherwise Windows will ask for confirmation on whether to install the unsigned driver After that you will be able to configure the network connection and specify drivers for the video adapter USB and other devices 5 2 2 2 Applying Universal Restore to multiple operating systems During recovery you can use Universal Restore for operating systems of a certain type all Windows systems all Linux systems or both If your selection of volumes to recover contains multiple Windows systems you can specify all drivers for them in a single list Each driver will be installed in the operating system for which it is intended
383. volumes cannot fit into unallocated space they will be proportionally resized by decreasing their free space The table below demonstrates the resulting volume types depending on the backed up source and the recovery target Backup source Recovered to Dynamic volume Basic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the target Type as of the target Unallocated space disk group Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the source Simple Basic volume Basic volume Basic volume or unallocated space on a basic disk Moving and resizing volumes during recovery You can manually resize the resulting basic volume during recovery or change the volume s location on the disk A resulting dynamic volume cannot be moved or resized manually Preparing disk groups and volumes Before recovering dynamic volumes to bare metal you should create a disk group on the target hardware You also might need to create or increase unallocated space on an existing disk group This can be done by deleting volumes or converting basic disks to dynamic You might want to change the target volume type basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 This can be done by deleting the target volume and creating a new volume on the resulting unallocated space Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to perform the above operations both under the operating system and on bare meta
384. w displays the expected partition layout according to the settings you have chosen Click OK if you are satisfied with the layout and the Acronis Secure Zone creation will start How the settings you make will be processed This helps you to understand how creating the Acronis Secure Zone will transform a disk containing multiple volumes Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk When calculating the final layout of the volumes the program will first use unallocated space at the end If there is no or not enough unallocated space at the end of the disk but there is unallocated space between volumes the volumes will be moved to add more unallocated space to the end When all unallocated space is collected but it is still not enough the program will take free space from the volumes you select proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked volumes requires a reboot However there should be free space on a volume so that the operating system and applications can operate for example for creating temporary files The program will not decrease a volume where free space is or becomes less than 25 of the total volume size Only when all volumes on the disk have 25 or less free space will the program continue decreasing the volumes proportionally As is apparent from the above setting the maximum possible zone size is not advisable You will end up with no free space on any volume which might ca
385. when the file was last modified Disabling this feature will make the program compare the entire file contents to those stored in the archive 4 7 11 File level backup snapshot This option is effective only for file level backup in Windows and Linux operating systems This option defines whether to back up files one by one or by taking an instant data snapshot Note Files that are stored on network shares are always backed up one by one The preset is Create snapshot if it is possible Select one of the following Always create a snapshot The snapshot enables backing up of all files including files opened for exclusive access The files will be backed up at the same point in time Choose this setting only if these factors are critical that is backing up files without a snapshot does not make sense To use a snapshot the backup plan has to run under the account with the Administrator or Backup Operator privileges If a snapshot cannot be taken the backup will fail Create a snapshot if it is possible Back up files directly if taking a snapshot is not possible Do not create a snapshot Always back up files directly Administrator or Backup Operator privileges are not required Trying to back up files that are opened for exclusive access will result in a read error Files in the backup may be not time consistent 4 7 12 File level security These options are effective only for file level backup in Windows operating
386. will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required Select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box if successful execution of the command is critical for you The command is considered failed if its exit code is not equal to zero If the command execution fails the program will remove the resulting TIB file and temporary files if possible and the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed in the Log view 5 Click Test Command to check if the command is correct 4 7 18 Pre Post data capture commands This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after data capture that is taking the data snapshot Data capture is performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 at the beginning of the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when the pre post data capture commands are executed Pre backup Pre data Dat Post data Post backup command capture capture capture command command command If the Volume Shadow Copy Service p 95 option is enabled the commands execution and the Microsoft VSS actions will be sequenced as follows Before da
387. will be operational in a short time Users will be able to open the necessary files from the storage and use them while the rest of the files which are not immediately necessary are being recovered in the background Examples movie collection storage music collection storage multimedia storage How to use 1 Back up the system disk or volume to a location accessible through the system s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start Create bootable media If a system failure occurs boot the machine using the bootable media Start the console and connect to the bootable agent 4 Configure the system recovery select the system disk or volume and select the Use Acronis Active Restore check box Acronis Active Restore will choose for the boot up and subsequent recovery the first operating system found during the backup scan Do not try to recover more than one operating system using Active Restore if you want the result to be predictable When recovering a multi boot system choose only one system volume and boot volume at a time 5 Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The Acronis Active Restore icon
388. you started the plan creation from the list Thus you can perform the remaining steps and accomplish the backup plan creation amp Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 Cc r E Fad connect Actions Tape management Disk management Tape management Manage mounted images Alerts AMS start page Group Machines with agents Machine start page Back up now V Creste backup plan Navigation buttons 2 1 3 Console options The console options define the way information is represented in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 11 To access the console options select Options gt Console options from the top menu 2 1 3 1 Alert display options The option specifies which alerts to show and which to hide in the Alerts view The preset is All alerts To show hide alerts select clear the check boxes next to the respective alert types 2 1 3 2 Credentials cache The option specifies whether to store the credentials entered while using the management console The preset is Disabled If the option is disabled access credentials for various locations that you enter during a console session are stored only until the console is closed If the option is enabled the credentials are saved for use during later sessions In Windows the credentials are stored in the Windows Credential Manager In Linux the credentials are stored ina special encrypted file 2 1 3 3 Fonts The option defines
389. ype windows7Server64Guest acronisTag os servicepack 1 acronisTag os sid S 1 5 21 874133492 782267321 3928949834 4 2 10 Why is the program asking for the password A scheduled or postponed task has to run regardless of users being logged on In case you have not explicitly specified the credentials under which the task s will run the program proposes using your account Enter your password specify another account or change the scheduled start to manual 4 3 Simplified naming of backup files When creating a backup plan p 29 you can choose between standard and simplified naming of backup files If you select the Name backup files using the archive name check box The file name of the first full backup in the archive will consist of the archive name for example MyData tib The file names of subsequent incremental or differential backups will have an index For example MyData2 tib MyData3 tib and so on This simple naming scheme enables you to create a portable image of a machine on a detachable media or move the backups to a different location by using a script Before creating a new full backup the software will delete the entire archive and start a new one This behavior is useful when you rotate USB hard drives and want each drive to keep a single full backup p 50 or all backups created during a week p 51 But you might end up with no backups if a full backup to your only drive f
390. ypical situations that require additional user actions Why a recovered operating system may be unbootable The machine BIOS is configured to boot from another HDD Solution Configure the BIOS to boot from the HDD where the operating system resides The system was recovered on dissimilar hardware and the new hardware is incompatible with the most critical drivers included in the backup Solution Boot the machine using bootable media and apply Acronis Universal Restore p 112 to install the appropriate drivers and modules Windows was recovered to a dynamic volume that cannot be bootable Solution Recover Windows to a basic simple or mirrored volume A system volume was recovered to a disk that does not have an MBR When you configure recovery of a system volume to a disk that does not have an MBR the program prompts whether you want to recover the MBR along with the system volume Opt for not recovering only if you do not want the system to be bootable Solution Recover the volume once again along with the MBR of the corresponding disk The system uses Acronis OS Selector Because the Master Boot Record MBR can be changed during the system recovery Acronis OS Selector which uses the MBR might become inoperable If this happens reactivate Acronis OS Selector as follows Solution Boot the machine from the Acronis Disk Director s bootable media and select in the menu Tools gt Activate OS Selector The system uses GRan
391. ys For more details see the Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 39 section Season schedule Run the task on all workdays during the northern autumn seasons of 2009 and 2010 During a workday the task is performed every 6 hours from 12 AM midnight till 6 PM The schedule s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months September October November 2 On lt all gt lt workdays gt 3 Every 6 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 06 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 08 30 2009 Actually the task will be started on the first workday of September By setting up this date we just define that the task must be started in 2009 To 12 01 2010 Actually the task will end on the last workday of November By setting up this date we just define that the task must be discontinued in 2010 after autumn ends in the northern hemisphere Several monthly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days or weeks with different time intervals depending on the month consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desired month or several months Suppose that the task goes into effect on 11 01 2009 During northern winter the task runs once at 10PM on every workday During northern spring and autumn the task runs every 12 hours on all workdays During northern summer the task runs every first and fifteenth of every month at 10 PM

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11 Server f/Windows, 1srv, 1y, Level I, DEU

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup &amp; Recovery 11 Server f/Windows, 1srv, 1y, Level I, DEU

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11 Server f/Windows, 1srv, 1y, Level I, DEU